DRAFTSMAN

CIVIL NOTES
 DRAFTSMAN SYLLABUS
CIVIL

1. Introduction 1- 22
Importance of safety and general precautions obsered in the in the industry/shop floor.
Introduction of First aid. Introducrtion of PPEs. Introduction to 5'S concept and it's ap-
plication, Response to emergencies e.g. power failure, fire alarm, etc.
Importance of B.I.S. Introduction of Code for practice of Architectural and Building Draw-
ings. (IS: 962-1989, SP-46: 2003). Layout of drawing. Lines, Lettering, Dimensioning.
Knowledge of different types of scale. Principle of R.F. Different types of projection
views. Orthographic, Isometric, Oblique and Prespectivel.

2. Materials: 23 - 48
Characteristics, types and uses: Stones, Bricks, Lime, Pozzolanic, Cement.

3. Building materials: 48 - 77
Characteristics, types and uses: Sand, Clay Products, Mortar and Concrete, Timber,
Types, Alternative material to Timber, Plywood, Block board, Particle board, Fireproof
reinforced plastic (FRP), Medium density fireboard (MDF) etc., Tar bitumen, asphalt.

4. Protective materials: 78 - 93
Characteristic, types, uses: Paints, Varnishes, Metal, Plastics.

5. Building Construction: 94 - 96
• Sequence and Name of different parts of building.
• STONE MASONRY: Terms, use and classification.
• Brick masonry- Tools and equipments used.

6. Building Construction, Foundation 97 - 106

• Purpose, types and causes of failure of foundation
• Bearing capacity of soils
• Dead and live loads
• Examination of ground
• Drawing of footing foundation setting out of building on ground excavation.
• Simple machine foundation.
7. Building Construction: 107 - 113
Types of shoring and scaffolding. Types of Underpinning and Timbering.
8. Treatments of building structures: 114 - 115
• DPC Sources and effects of dampness.
• Method of prevention of dampness in building.
• Damp proofing materials-properties, function and types.
• Fire proofing-effect and rules.
9. Arches: 116 - 133
Technical terms, types centering.
Lintel: Types, wooden brick stone, steel and RCC.
Chajjas: Characteristics
Carpentry joints: Classification of joints, Uses, types of fixtures, fastenings.
Doors: Parts, Location, standard sizes, types.
Windows: Types.
Ventilators: purpose, types
Flooring: materials used, types
Stairs: Terms Requirements, Planning and designing of stair and details of construction.
10. Roofs and Roof coverings: 134 - 138
• Objectives, types and uses.
• Truss-king post, queen post, mansard, steel, composite.
11. Parks and play ground & Earthquake : 139 -155
Types of recreation, landscaping etc.
Concepts of design of earthquake resisting buildings-requirements resistance, safety, flexible building ele-
ments, special requirements, base isolation techniques.
12. Surveying: 156 - 172
Principles of chain survey. Classification, accuracy, types.
• Instrument employed
• Chaining.
• Bearing and each included angle of close traverse.
• Magnetic declination and its true bearing.
• Precaution in using prismatic compass.
Plane table survey:
• Instrument used in plane table survey
• Care and maintenance of plane table.
13. Levelling: 173 - 183
• Auto level, dumpy Level, Titing Level.
• Principle of levelling.
• Levelling saffs, its graduation and types.
• Equipment required.
• Types, component/part and function.
• Temporary and permanent adjustment, procedure in setting up.
• Level and horizontal surface. Datum Benchmark, Focusing and parallax.
• Deduction of levels/Reduced Level.
• Types of levelling, Application to chain and Levelling Instrument to Building construction.
• Contouring: Definition, Characteristics, Methods.
• Interpolation of Contour, Contour gradient, Uses of Contour plan and Map.
14. Theodolite Survey: 184 - 188
• Types of theodolite.
• Uses, Methods of Plotting.
• Transit vernier theodolite
• Fundamental line, adjustment, errors of theodolite.
• Measurement of horizontal and vertical angle.
• Adjustment of a close traverse.
• Problems in transit theodolite departure, latitude, northing and easting.
15. Electrical Wiring: 189 - 196
• Elementary electricity and General ideas of supply system.
• Wireman's tools kit, Wiring materials. Electrical fittings.
• System of wiring. Wiring installation for domestic lightings.
16. Building Planning: 197 - 205
Principle of planning.
• Local building Bye-Laws as per ISI code.
• Layout plan and key plan.
• Submitted in composition of drawing.
• Provision for safety.
• Requirement of green belt and land.
• Economy and orientation
• Provision for lighting, ventilation, drainage and santiation.
• Planning and designing of residential, public and commerical building.
17. Computer aided drafting (Auto CAD): 206 - 214
1. Creating and saving a new Drawing.
2. Drawing commands: Line, Poly line/Double line, Arc, Ellipse, Polygon, Rectangle, Spline,
Circle, Sketch, Hatch, Donuts.
3. Viewing an Existing Drawing: Zoom, Pan Redraw and Regen all, Regen Auto, View
4. Modifying an Existing Drawing: Undo/Redo/Oops, Trim, Move, Offset, Rotate, Array,
Stretch, Divide, Chamfer, Erase, Break, Copy, multiple copy, Mirror, Change (change prop-
erties), Extend, Explode, Blipmode, Scale, Fillet.
5. Making and Inserting Blocks: Blocks, Insert block, Base, Using library for blocks, W-
block, X-ref, Explode.
6. Dimensioning and Text: type, style, units, utilities, variables, Dimensioning of different
elements like Arc, Circle Radius, diameter, continous dimensioning etc. Editing dimension
test and updating. Text style-font types, height, width factor etc.
18. Reinforced cement concrete structure: 215 - 233
• Matrials-proportions
• Form work
• Bar bending details as per IS Code.
• Reinforced brick work.
Materials used for RCC:
• Selection of materials – coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, cement water and reinforcement.
• Method of mixing concrete-machine mixing and hand mixing.
• Slump test.
• Structure-columns, beams, slab-one-way slab and two-way slab.
• Innovative construction.
• Safety against earthquake.
• Grade of cement, steel-behaviour and test.
• Bar-bending schedule.
• Retaining wall.
• R.C.C. Framed structure.
19. Steel Structures: 234 - 245
• Common forms of steel sections.
• Structural fasterners, Joints.
20. House drainage of building: 246 - 268
• Systems of sanitation and house drainage.
• Plumbing, sanitary fittings, etc.
• Types of sewars.
• Systems of plumbing.
• Manholes and Septic tank.
• Water treatment plant.
• Sewage treatment plant.
21. Roads: 269 - 277
• Classification and construction of different types of roads.
• Road curves, gradient.
• Curves-types, designation of curves.
• Road drainage system.
22. Bridges and Culvert: 278 - 289
• Parts of bridge
• Classification of culverts.
• IRC loading.
• Selection of type and location.
• Factors governing the ideal site.
• Alignment of bridge
• Foundation selection
• Coffer dam - types
• Types of super structure.
• Substructure-piers, abutments, wing walls.
• Classification of bridge.
• Tunnels-rules used for the sizes of different members.
23. Railways: 290 - 313
• Rail gauges, Functions Requirements, Types, Sections, Length of rail.
• Coning of wheels, hogged rail, bending of rail, creep of rail.
• Causes and prevention of creep.
• Sleeper and ballast-function, types requirement, materials rail.
• Fixtures, Fastening and plate laying in rail.
• Joints-types, fish plate, fish bolt-spikes, chairs and keys-bearing plate, block elatic, base plate.
• Anchors and anti-creepers.
• Construction of permanent ways.
• Railway station and yard.
24. Irrigation Engineering: 314 - 321
• Hydrology like duty, delta, base period, intensity of irrigation.
• Hydrograph, peak flow, run off, catchment area, CCA corps like, rabi, kharif etc.
• Storage, diversion headwork-characteristic and types.
• Dams, weir and barrage-types purposes.
• Hydro, electric project like Forebay, Penstock, Turbines, Power house etc.
• Canals-classification and distribution system, canal structures.
• Types of cross drainage works like Aquaduct, Super passage Syphon, Level crossing,
inlet and outlet, etc.
25. Estimating and Costing: 322 - 343
• Purpose and common techniques.
• Estimate-necessity, importance, types-approximate and detailed estimate-main and sub
estimates, revised supplementary, maintenace/repair estimate-taking off quantities-method.
• Rate analysis of typical items and their specifications.
• Govt. Schedule of rate.
26. Total Station: 344 - 47
• Characteristics, features.
• Working and need.
• Setting and measurement.
• Electronic display and Data reading.
• Rectangular and polar co-ordinate system
• Terminology of open and closed traverse.

27.) UKSSSC DRAFTSMAN ( CIVIL ) 2017 348 - 363

28.) UKSSSC SURVEYOR 13-5-2018 364 - 381

29.) HARYANA DRAFTSMAN ( CIVIL ) INSTRUCTOR

2019 , MORNING SESSION 382 - 387

30.) HARYANA DRAFTSMAN ( CIVIL ) INSTRUCTOR

2019 , AFTERNOON SESSION 388 - 398

31.) P.U.D.A. DRAFTSMAN ( CIVIL ) , 26 - 05 - 2013 399 - 406

32.) PSSSB JUNIOR DRAFTSMAN Paper (1) 407 - 421
33.) PSSSB JUNIOR DRAFTSMAN Paper (2) 422 - 430
34.) UPSSC DRAFTSMAN PAPER, 27-12-2015 431 - 455

35.) JKSSB DRAFTSMAN 2019 456 - 472

36.) HPPSC DRAFTSMAN 2021 473 - 480

 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

(d) both (b) and (c) Engineering

6. What is the function of industrial (b) Road, Railway and Bridge Engineering
training institutes ? (c) Irrigation Engineering
(a) To provide medical services (d) All of these
(b) To prepare a skilled and efficient 12. The _____ edge opposite to the
workman by the end of training in working edge of Tee-square should
respective trades not be use for drawing horizontal lines-
(c) To complete projects of other [NCVT 2016]
organization
(a) upper (b)top
(d) To teach general studies
(c) lower (d) side
7. Following is not a rule in institutes -
13. What is the time duration of the
(a) to follow a dress code in the institute draughtsmanship course ?
(b) to respect the seniors (a) 1 to 2 years (b) 2 to 3 years
(c) to resolve a problem in the institute by (c) 3 to 4 years (d) 4 to 5 years
yourself
14. Following material is not used during
(d) to participate in different activities in the training-
institute
(a) tracing sheet (b) drawing pin
8. Following is not a subject taught in
(c) drawing ink (d) mini drafter
civil draughtsmanship-
15. A draughtman prepares drawings
(a) building construction/construction
based on the instructions given by -
materials
(a) engineer (b) surveyor
(b) digital communication
(c) other draughtsman (d) private architect
(c) R.C.C and iron structures
16. Which of the following has prepared
(d) cleanliness and water hygiene
the national curriculum for industrial
9. Which of the following instrument is used training institutes ?
in training ?
(a) National highway authority
(a) Tracing table (b) Divider
(b) Bridge corporation
(c) Pencil (d) Clip
(c) Indian government
10. Which of the following capabilities
(d) Central public works department
should be developed by a student by the
end of the semester ? 1. (c) 2. (c) 3. (c) 4. (a) 5 .
(d) 6. (b) 7. (c) 8. (b) 9 .
(a) To make a fully developed drawing as
(b) 10. (d)
per instructions using line sketches
11. (d) 12. (c) 13. (b) 14. (d) 15.
(b) To use pen, pencil and ink at correct
(a) 16. (c)
place
BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS
(c) To calculate the cost and materials
based on a detailed estimate of building and Specifications for all it's objects are laid out by
other details. the BIS in its various books. Lighting equipment,
machine etc. all should be certified by BIS.
(d) All of these
The BIS is India's national standard body that
11. Which of the following subject is taught
functions under the ministry of consumer affairs food
in civil draughtsmanship ?
and public distribution. It was formed under the Indian
(a) Water Supply and Cleanliness Standards Act, 1986 & it came into existence on 23rd

[ 6 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

December 1986. 7. Scale

This organization was earlier called the Indian 8. Folding of prints
Standards Institute which was established on 3rd LAYOUT OF DRAWING
September 1946 and registered under the Societies
These standards are applicable to the following
Registration Act, 1860.
subjects of engineering drawing -
Importance of BIS
1. Drawing sheet (size, layout etc) - IS 10711 :
The BIS works for consumer welfare. Its main 1983 which has been taken from ISO 5457 : 1980.
objectives are as follows-
2. Lettering for technical drawing - IS 9609 :
1. To encourage standardization and quality 1983 which has been taken from ISO : 3098/ 1 -
control. 1947 (E).
2. For constant development of standardization, 3. Lines (for representing technical drawings) -
notation and quality certification. IS 10714 : 1983 which has been taken from ISO 128
3. To develop nation strategies for increasing : 1982 (E).
production and export as per the standards followed. Layout of Drawing Sheets
Advantages of BIS Standards for The types of layouts of drawing sheets are as
Costomers follows -
1. It's products against exploitation and fraud. Sizes of Drawing Sheets - IS 10711 : 1983
2. It is helpful in the selection of standard specifies the size and layout specifications of drawing
products. sheets. Usually,engineering students use A2 or A3
3. It provides assurance protection against any size drawing sheets.
risk related to life or wealth. After flexing drawing sheet on the drawing
INTRODUCTION OF CODE PRACTICE board, The border line and title block are drawn.
FOR ARCHITECTURAL AND BUILDING Lines - IS 10714 : 2001
DRAWINGS (IS 962 : 1989) • In engineering graphics, the details of
Indian Standards (second revision) was included various objects are drawn by different types of
by the BIS on 3rd April 1989. IS 962 :1989 describes lines.
the standard methods for standard dimensioning, • Each line has a definite meaning and sense
planning and drawing of building construction and to convey as given below:
architectural drawing. The main objective of IS 962
: 1989 code is standardization of drawings of different
architecture & building, in order to avoid errors in
civil work. IS 962 : 1989 has been established
according to international standards for drawings,
scale, lettering, line work, dimensioning and their
naming, and materials used in buildings.
Is 962 :1989 provides the practice code for
architecture and building drawing. Following
recommendations have been given as per this code
1. Sizes and layout for drawing
2. Lettering
3. Projection
4. Dimensioning
5. Abbreviations
6. Symbols used in building drawing

[ 7 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

Types of lines and their uses

S.No Materials Conventions

Lines Description Applications 1. Steel, Cast iron, Aluminium and its alloys.

Visible outline Lead, Zinc, Tin, White Metal, etc.

A Continuous thick 2.
Visible edges

Dimensions lines 3. Brass, Bronze, Gun Metal, etc.

Projection lines
Continuous thin
B Leader lines
Hatching 4. Glass

Continuous thin
C Long-break line
with zigzags
5. Porcelain, Stoneware, Marble, Slate, etc.

Hidden outlines
D Dashed line Asbestos, Felt, Paper, Mica, Cork, Rubber, Leather,
Hidden edges 6. Wax, Insulating Materials
Centre line
E Chain thin Lines of symmetry 7. Wood, Plywood
Trajectories
pitch circle of holes and gears
8. Earth
F Chain thin, thick at ends
and change in direction Cutting planes
9. Brickwork, Masonry, Firebrick, etc.

Line widths:
10. Concrete
• The width of the line means the thickness
of line & it remains constant throughout the
whole line. 11. Water, Oil, Petrol, Kerosene, etc.

• The general line widths adopted are 0.13,

0.18, 0.25, 0.35, 0.5, 0.7, 1.0, 1.4 & 2.0 mm. Lettering
Conventions for Materials • The representation of the descriptions of
• The conventions for materials are used to detailed information regarding the structure and
represent various materials in section which shape of any machine through line diagrams i.e
saves time, labour and makes drawing simple. drawings, is called lettering. This can be done
in different ways. Please refer to IS 9609 (Part
Diagrammatic Representation of various I) : 1983 for its detailed description.
materials. • Lettering should be made clean,
unambiguous, legible, uniform style, and simple
enough to be practised rapidly by freehand.
• Nominal size: the nominal size of lettering
is defined by the height (h) of the outline contour
of the uppercase (Capital) letters.
Types of lettering
• The letters are classified into two
categories-single stroke and double stroke.
• Indian standards recommends single stroke

[ 8 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

letters in the design practice. These are Type of letter Letter Width
simplest forms of letters and are employed in
I 1unit
most of the engineering drawing.
J,L 5units
Note: Lettering is just freehand drawing.
C,E,F 6units
Do You Know ?
Capital or upper case letters A,Q,V,XY 8units
Single stroke does not mean that lettering
should be done in single stroke without lifting M 9units
the pencil, it implies that the thickness of the W 12units
letter should be uniform such that it is obtained All other capital letters 7units
in single stroke of pencil.
i 1unit
• Single stroke letters are of two types viz. j,t,r 3units
(i) vertical (ii) inclined. f,t 4units
Inclined letters lean to the right, the slope Lower case of small letters
m 9units
being 75° with the horizontal (or 15° with
w 10units
vertical).
all other small letters 6units
• Indian standards further classify the
lettering into four categories as: 1 4units
Number 3,5 5units
Lettering 'A '  Allother numericals 7units

Lettering 'B'  Use pencil and ink drawing
Lettering 'CA '
Note: Letters and numerals in type B lettering are
• In lettering 'A' type, the height of the wider than those in to type A and the line width
capital letter is divided into 14 parts and in is also more.
lettering 'B' types. It is divided into 10 parts.
Width of various letters as per Type B
lettering
Type of letter Letter Width
I 1unit
J 4 units
C, E, F, L 5 units
Capital or upper case letters
A, M,Q, V, X, Y 7 units
W 9 units
All other capital letters 6 units
i 1 unit
j 2 units
Lower case of small letters
c,f, j, r, t 4 units
All other small letters 5 units
1 3units
Numerals 4 6units
All other numerals 5units

Width of various letters as per Type A Height of letter (h)

lettering Height of letters

[ 9 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

Recommended height h of Letters/Numerals by BIS

MAIN TITLE of DRAWING : 5 mm or 7 mm or 10 mm
SUB-TITLES (FRONT VIEW, etc) : 35 mm or 5 mm
Dimensions, Numerals, Notes etc : 25 mm or 5 mm
Leader line
Dimensioning
• Indicating the sizes of the features of the
45° Projection line
object and other details essential for its
construction and function on a drawing by the Dimension
use of lines, numerals, symbols, notes, etc. is 250 200 100
called dimensioning.
Dimensioning
Dimension line Termination (Arrowhead)
The main points related to dimensioning are as
follows-
1. This should display the actual size of the (a) DImension line with arrowheads
structure.
2. Dimensioning symbols should be displayed in
the center.
3. Frame structure - column centered
dimensioning
4. Load bearing structure - rough, unfinished,
wall faces
500
5. Units - If is it in meter, then writen m, but if
it is in millimeter do not write mm, instead write "All
dimensions are in mm". Dimension Dimension Line
6. This is a thin line. It is drawn outside the
drawing . It should be drawn in such a way that it is (b) Dimension line with oblique strokes
easy to read.

3. Leader line: It is a continuous narrow

Elements of Dimensioning
line, connecting a dimensional value or a note
1. Dimension line: It is a continuous narrow with the corresponding features on the drawing.
line, drawn parallel to edge or surface whose
4. Dimension line terminations: The
measurement should be shown.
dimension lines will have terminations in the
2. Extension line or projection line: It is a form of arrowheads or oblique strokes.
continuously narrow like drawn perpendicular
(i) Arrowhead: An arrowhead is placed at
to the outline to be dimensioned and without
each end of a dimension line, its pointed end
leaving a gap from the outline. It is drawn
touches on outline, and extension line or a centre
extending slightly beyond the dimension line by
line. The arrowhead may be open, closed or
about 2 mm.
closed an filled in open type arrowhead is
prefeable for last execution.

[ 10 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

Method II: Unidirectional method

• In this method, the dimensions are
indicated so that they can be placed in only
horizontal direction, Non-horizontal dimesnion
lines (vertical and inclined) are interrupted, and
(a) Representation of arrowheads of (b) Representation of arrowheads the dimension value are inserted in such lines.
successive dimensions lines depending on space limitation

Fig. Representation of Dimensions lines

Note: Length of an arrowhead is approximately
three times the width. The size of the
arrowhead should be proportional to the
thickness of the outline.
(ii) Oblique stroke: When space is too small
for an arrowhead, the oblique stroke may be
substituted.

(i)

(ii) (b) Oblique stroke

(iii)

(iv)
1 unit CIVIL Ki GOLI Team (9255624029)
3 unit

(a) Different arrowheads (c) Arrowhead shape and its properties

Representation of different types of

Arrowheads
Methods of Dimensioning
• The dimensions are indicated on a drawing
as per one of the following methods as
recommended in BIS (SP 46-2003).
Method I: Aligned method
• As per this method, the dimensions are
placed parallel to the dimensions line and above
it preferable in the middle.
• Dimensional values are marked so that
they can be read either from the bottom or from
the right hand side of the drawing.

[ 11 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

centers of the holes) shall be dimensioned in the

view in which holes are visible.
Also, Extension Line starts from the view
and extend 2 mm beyond the dimension line.
7. Dimensions shall be given to visible lines
and not to hidden (invisible) lines.
Also, (dimension value should be placed
little (approximately 2 mm) above the dimeision
line and not on the dimension line.
8. Taper on diameter shall not be dimensioned
as shown

Dd 1
Example, taper = 
L 10
9. If dimensioning inside a hatched portion of
a drawing is unavoidable, the hatching lines
should not cut the dimensional text.
10. Repeated features: Repeated features of
the same size and marked to avoid repeating
the same dimensional value.
Note Should always be written horizontally
leader line shall be inclined at an angle of 30°,
45° or 60° to the horizontal shown.
Rules for Dimensioning
11. Overall dimensioning: Overall
1. Mark the dimensions outside the view
dimension shall be placed outside the
(However, Diameter of circle/Radius of arc
intermediate dimensions i.e., smaller dimensions
may be shown inside).
shall be placed near the view and the larger
2. Do not repeat the same, dimensions must further away so that extension lines do not
be shown, but none should be shown more than cross-dimension lines. (Extension lines may
once. cross each other or the outlines of the drawing,
Also, dimensions should not be placed very such as the case of leader lines).
near to the parts being dimensioned. When an overall dimension is shown one
3. A circle shall be dimensionned by its of the intermediate dimensions should not be
diameter symbol (and an arc by its radius marked.
symbol R). Convertion  or R shall be placed Types of Lines
before the dimensional value.
As per Indian Standards ten types of lines are
Also, Center Lines (Axes) should extend used in building drawing, out of which first four types
approximately 3 mm beyond the outline of the of lines (from A to D) are continuous, thick and thin.
part whose symmetry they indicate.
1. outline (Type A) - These are used used for
4. Center line (axis) itself shall not be used drawing visible outlines and edges. It is also called
as a dimension line with arrowheads at its ends. object line.
5. Dimensioning from a center line is 2. Dimension (Type B1) - This is a thin and
incorrect, except when the centre line passes continuous line. Arrow heads touching the expansion
through the centre of a hole. lines are made at the ends of this line. These type
6. Location of holes ( distance between the of lines are used to represent the dimension of the

[ 12 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

diagrams. Shrunk Scale = Original scale × Shrinkage factor (SF)

(i) Leader Line (Type B 5) - These can be
Shrinkage Ratio (SR) or (SF) =
represented in three types -
Shrunk length Shrunk RF Shrunk Scale
(a) with a dot  
Original length Original RF Original Scale
(b) with an arrow
(c) without dot or with an arrow head Special Points:

(ii) Hatching Line (Type B 4) - These types 1 1

1. Scale is larger RF than scale.
lines are skew and parallel. The distance between 100 1000
these lines should be atleast twice the thickness of 2. Graphical Scales are much better than Numerical
scales.
the thickest line of the drawing, and the spacing
between them should never be less than 0.7 mm.
Error due to use of Wrong Scale
3. Short Break Line (Type C1) - This is a thin, (i) Correct length =
continuous, and free - hand curve line. It is used to
represent a short break in the diagram and irregular RF of wrong scale
 Measured length
ends of an object. RF of correct scale
4. Long Break Line (Type D1) - These are (ii) Correct area =
thin, continuous line with zig-zag drawn at three or 2
 RF of wrong scale 
four places. These are used to show any long or big    Measured area
 RF of correct scale 
part of the object in less space in the diagram.
Retrograde Vernier
5. Dotted Hidden Line (Type E 2 or F 2) -
These are used to show the hidden parts of an object  Reading increase in a
in the diagram. direction opposite to
that of the main scale.
6. Centre Line (Type G2) - These are used
to show the centre of circular objects or a circle.  Retrograde vernier has
These are drawn by successively drawing a long divisions which are
dash and a short dash. slightly longer than
those of the main scale.

Scale of a map: It is the fixed ratio that every  6m 0 6m

distance on the plan bears with corresponding distance 0

on the ground.
 Engineer scale 1 cm = 30 m
5m 5m

1 Reading = 6.00 m
(a)
Reading = 5.75 m
(b)
Representative fraction (R.F.) =
3000
Retrograde Vernier (nv = (n + 1)s)
Map distance
Representive fraction (RF) =
Ground distance
Direct Vernier
Types of scales  Reading increases in a
direction to that of the
Plain scale Shrunk scale Vernier scale Diagonal scale main scale.
 The direct vernier has
divisions which are
Direct vernier Retrograde vernier
slightly shorter than
(i) Plain Scale: Used to measure two dimensions those of the main scale
only, like units & length.
(ii) Shrunk Scale

[ 13 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

10
6m 6m
10
5
Projection

Vernier scale
Main scale

Main scale
5
0
Index
5m 0 5m mark

5.00m 5.00m
(a) (a)
Parallel Projection Perspective (Photographic)
Direct Vernier
nv  ( n  1) s
Photographic Oblique Linear Aerial
Projection Prespective Projection Prespective Projection
Least count of Vernier Scale =
s Projection
n Cabinet
S = Value of one smallest division of main scale
One point P.P.
Axanometric Cavilier
n = no. of division on the vernier
Two point P.P.
Diagonal Scale: It is possible to measure in three 1st angle projection Clignographic
dimensions such as meters, decimeter, centimeters Axanometric
& unit, tenth, hudreds. 2nd angle projection Shades & Three point P.P.
Dimetric shadow
3rd angle projection
Generally used scales for measurement purpose are :
Trimetric
S.N. Type of Scale Scales R.F. value 4th angle projection
1. Cadastral map 1 cm = 5 m to 0.25 km 1 1
to
500 5000

2. Topographical map 1 cm = 2.5 km 1

or less
(a) Buildings 1 cm = 10 m or less 1000
1 1
(b) Town planning 1 cm = 50 m to 100 m to Orthographic projection
5000 10,000
( c)Location map 1 cm = 50 m to 200 m 1
to
1 Orthographic projection is a parallel
5000 20,000
(d) Small Scale 1 cm = 0.25 km to 2.5 km 1 1 projection in which projectors are parallel to
to
Topographic Survey 25,000 2,50, 000
(e) Mines 1 cm = 10 m to 25 m each other and perpendicular to plane of
(f) Forest Scale 1 cm = 0.25 km
projection, according to ortho graphic projection,
we have 6 principle views and these are-----
3. Preliminary survey of rails 1 cm = 10 m to 60 m
& roads
1. Front view (Elevation) – appears on
vertical plane (VP)
Projections 2. Top views (Plan) – appears on horizntal
In first angle projection, every view is such that plane (HP)
it projects the size of the object positioned at a 3. LHSV (profile/End) – appears on profile
distance from it on the adjacent view. Plese refer to plane/AVP, auxillary vertical plane
IS 10714 : 1983 for detailed description of the 4. RHSV (Profile/End) – appears on profile
principles of projections. plane/AVP, auxillary vertical plane
Projection means to throw something and 5. Rear view (Back view) – appears on VP.
it has been classified according to the line of 6. Bottom views – appears on HP.
sight and according to the position of plane of
The arrangement of these views on
projection and its classifcation are as under-
drawing sheet are as follows:

[ 14 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

2. Here the object is in between the observer

and plane of projection (POP)
Vertically 3. Here, POP is assumed to be non
arranged
transparent.
HP
Bottom 4. This method is adopted in India and almost
view all the countries except USA.
3rd Angle projection
V.P PP VP PP
Horizontal
1. Here the object is placed below the HP and
Rear view RHSV FV LHSV arranged
behind the VP.
HP
2. Here, the plane of projection is in between
Top
view the observer and object.
3. Here, POP assumed to be transparent.
4. USA
Note:
Quadrant System
1. We will never work on 2nd angle 4th angle
Position of object w.r.t. HP and VP projection method because the views will
Position of Fv and TV w.r.t xy overlap.
1. Above HP and infront of VP 2. Ist angle and 3rd angle projection method
FV is only working projection method.
x y
TV

2. Above HP and beind VP

FV & TV
x y Plan
(On Looking from Top)

3. Below HP and behind VP A.V.P.

L.H. Side View

V.P. (On Looking

TV from Left)
x y
FV Plan Front
(On Looking from Top) (On Looking
from Front)
4. Below HP and infront of VP
First Angle
x y H.P. Projection
FV & TV
H.P.

A.V.P.
V.P.

Third Angle Front

Projection (On Looking from Front)
Object

VP Ist

HP (On Looking from Left)

HP
IIIrd VP IV

CW Comparision between First and Third Angle

Projection
1. The color of brick as per IS code :
1st angle projection 1962-1967-
1. Here the object is placed above the HP and [NCVT 2016]
infront of VP
(a) red (b) vermillion

[ 15 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

(c) violet (d) mud

2. Existing work is shown by ______
color on the blue print of site plan.
P G
[NCVT 2016]
(a) white (b) blue
(c) black (d) green
P P
3. The art of projecting the views at right
angles is called______projections.
Two Panel Half Glass
[NCVT 2016] & Half Panel

(a) first angle (b) second angle

7. Electrical Symbols
(c) orthographic (d) projection planes
1. (b) 2. (a) 3. (c) Power Panel
List of Symbols
Telephone Cabinet
Generally, while preparing building drawing common
symbols/notations are used instead of elaborate and
T Transformer
repeated description. Such few sysmbols/notations
are listed below as per is 1962–1989.
Fluorescent Fixture

1. Existing Building
Incandescent Light

Wiring Concealed in
2. Brick Wall Construction

Ceilling
S Single-Pole Switch
3. Concrete Masonry S3 Three Way Switch
–E– Emergency Wiring
Construction
Exhaust Fan
EF
4. Partition Blocks
Telephone Outlet
5. Wood
T Thermostat

8. Plumbing Symbols
Pipe Anchor or Support
Screwed Elbow Turned Up
G Screwed Elbow Turned Down

6. Flanged Union
Screwed Union
Gate Valve-Screwed
Full Glass Flush Doors Check Valve-Flanged
Check Valve
Automatic Control Gate Valve

[ 16 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

V (a) 25mm (b) 30mm

Vent Point (c) 35mm (d) 40mm
6. Which is not the use of divider ?
Balancing Valve (a) To divide curved or straight lines into the
desired number of equal parts
Supply Duct (b) To draw circles
(c) To transfer dimensions from one part of the
Water Closet-Wall drawing to another part
(d) To set-off given distances from the scale to
Hung
the drawing
7. The cardboard scales are available in a set
of _______ scales.
Water Closet-Floor
(a) Six (b) Ten
(c) Eight (d) Twelve
Outlet
8. _________ is used to draw curves which
are
Lavatory Wall Hung not circular.
(a) Compass (b) Protractor
(c) French curves (d) Pro circle
Wash Fountain 9. The areas of the two subsequent sizes of
drawing sheet are in the ratio ____
(a) 1:5 (b) 1:4
EWC (c) 1:2 (d) 1:10
Electric Water Cooker 10. The sizes from A0 to A5 increases.
(a) True
(b) False
11. The increase in hardness is shown by the
value of the figure put in front of the letter H,
Service Sink 2H, 3H, and 4H etc.
(a) True
(b) False
CIVIL Ki GOLI Team (9255624029) 12. What is the next size of 210 mm x 297 mm
in drawing papers?
1. How many battens will be there for a (a) 148 mm x 210 mm
Drawing board ? (b) 297 mm x 420 mm
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 420 mm x 594 mm
(c) 3 (d) 4 (d) 105 mm x 148 mm
2. The part that doesn"t belong to T-square is 13. The Grade becomes ______ according to
(a) Working edge (b) Blade the figure placed in front of the letter B, 2B,
(c) Stock (d) Ebony 3B, 4B etc.
3. The angle which we can"t make using a (a) Harder (b) Lighter
single set-square is (c) Darker (d) Softer
(a) 45o (b) 60o 14. The preferred size of the drawing sheets
(c) 30o
(d) 75o is
4. The angle which we can"t make using both recommended by the
the Set-squares is (a) B.I.S. (b) ASME
(a) 15o (b) 105o (c) ASTM (d) NIST
(c) 165o (d) 125o 15. The untrimmed size for _______ sheet is
5. Small bow compass can draw circles less 240 mm x 330 mm.
than _____ mm radius. (a) A1 (b) A3

[ 17 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

STONE MASONRY
This building units (which are generally called
masonry units) are blocks of stone, brick or
prefabricated concrete. When stones are used in
masonry work, then it is called stone masonry.
Types of Stone Masonry
There are mainly two types of stone masonry, rubble
stone masonry & ashlar stone masonry. In rubble
stone masonry, stones of irregular shapes are used
but in ashlar stone masonry stones are dressed to
regular shapes and then used as building blocks.
Rubble Masonry: Irregular shaped & size stones Coursed Rubble Masonry
are used in rubble stone masonry. They may be Square Rubble Masonry: It have straight bed &
hammered to remove sharp corners, before using. sides. The faces are hammer dressed. Interiors are
The following are the different types of rubble stone filled with irregular stones and mortar. In it, masonry
masonry: may be coursed or uncoursed. The courses need not
• Dry rubble masonry be of same height.
• Square rubble masonry
• Random rubble masonry
• Miscellaneous
Dry Rubble Masonry: It is the cheapest type of T
masonry. In this walls are built in courses, but without
mortar. To make it stable, two courses of about 0.54 T
m length at the corners are built with mortar on each
course. It is extensively used for building compound
T
walls. T
Random Rubble Masonry: In this type of stone
masonry, quarry dressed stones of various shapes T
and sizes are used. It is necessary to use through
stones at frequent interval. Care should be taken to T = Through stone
break long vertical joints. There are two types of Square rubble : built to courses
random stone masonry (uncoursed & coursed).
There are courses of sizes 300 mm to 450 mm but all
courses are not of the same height.
T
X

T
Through stone (T)

T
T = Through stone
Square rubble : regular coursed

X
Elevation Section X-X
Uncoursed Rubble Masonry

[ 23 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

than half the height. Ashlar masonry may be further

classified as:
Ashlar fine tooled: This is the finest & also costliest
type of stone masonry. In this type stone blocks are
chisel dressed on all six faces. They are built in
regular courses. Mortar joints are thin. The thickness
of mortar joints does not exceed 3 mm. Figure shows
elevation of a typical fine tooled ashlar masonry.
Square rubble uncoursed
Square Rubble Masonry
Miscellaneous Type Random Masonry: The
following two types of random stone masonry are
also built:
• Flint walling
• Polygonal walling
In polygonal walling, hammer finished stones are
arranged to give polygonal shapes on the face. In
case of flint walling stones have thickness of 50 - 75
mm only and the length is 150 - 300 mm. The flint
stones are extremely hard but brittle. To improve the Ashlar Fine Tooled
strength of wall, it is necessary to provide tacking/ Ashlar rough tooled: In this type of stone masonry,
lacing courses of bricks or tiles. Figure shows the only bed and sides are fine chiselled on facing side,
elevation of these two types of stone masonry. only a strip of about 25 mm is chisel finished along
the perimeter and inside facing is rough dressed. The
thickness of mortar joints may be upto 6 mm.
Ashlar rock or quarry faced: In this, stone blocks
are finished similar to ashlar rough blocks but interior
portion on facing side remains quarry finished only.
However, the projections exceeding 80 mm are
removed by hammering. Mortar joints upto 10 mm
are used in such stone mortar construction.

Polygonal walling
Coursed

Built to
course
1 to 2 m

Lacing
course

Lacing Ashlar Chamfered

course
Ashlar chamfered: In this type, on facing the strip
around the periphery is chamfered at an angle of 450
Flint walling and another strip of 12 mm is provided. The interior
Miscellaneous Type Random Masonry
remains quarry finished only. Figure shows this type
Ashlar Masonry
of wall face.
In it, stones are cut to regular shapes. The height of
Ashlar block in course: It is a type of stone
each stone in a course is 250 - 300 mm. They are
masonry which is intermediate to rubble and ashlar
square or regular in shape. The length of stone is
masonry. The height of blocks in a course is same
kept less than 3 times the height and it is not less

[ 24 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

but all courses need not be of the same height.

Usually, height of courses varies from 150 to 300
mm. The faces are hammer dressed. The vertical Cavity
Wall tie Concrete
joints are not as straight as in ashlar masonry. This Timber flooring
type of construction is used in heavy works like flooring

building retaining walls, piers of bridges, etc. 150 mm (min)

Ashlar facing: In it, ashlar facing is provided to brick, GL DPC GL

rubble or concrete walls. The facing blocks are not Concrete

Concrete
less than 200 mm in height and their width is about Tie sub-floor
1½ times the height. Bed joints are dressed perfectly. Concrete
(a) Cavity extending (b) Cavity concreted up to G L
Figure shows the cross section of a brick wall with up to concrete bed
ashlar facing. Cavity Walls at Foundation Level

It is necessary to take precautions to see that the

cavity does not become a breeding place for lizards
& insects. Care should be taken to see that excess
mortar and brickbats do not collect in the cavity, which
prevents drainage of water collected.
CIVIL Ki GOLI Team (9255624029)
1. Out of the following, which may be termed as
an unstratified Rock?
(a) Sandstone (b) Limestone
(c) Marble (d) Slate
2. A stone is rejected if it absorbs water more than
(a) 5% (b) 10%
(c) 20% (d) 25%
Ashalr Facing
Composite Masonry 3. Jumper is a tool used for
Cavity Wall (a) Testing of stones
A cavity wall consists of two separate walls with a
cavity between them. The two walls are known as (b) Quarrying of stones
leaves or skins. The two leaves may be of equal (c) Dressing of stones
thickness or of different thickness. It is found that
(d) None of the above
inner leaf is subjected to greater load from slab.
Hence, the inner leaf may be of larger thickness. 4. For the construction of domes
Width of cavity is usually 50 to 100 mm. Figure shows (a) Heavier stones are preferred
typical cavity walls. It is necessary to tie the two (b) Lighter stones are preferred
leaves with metal straps. The ties are placed 900 (c) Stones are not preferred
mm apart vertically and 450 mm apart horizontally. (d) Both lighter and heavier
Ties should be placed near jambs of doors and stones are preferred
windows. 5. The type of masonry in which the stones of
Advantages of providing cavity walls are: irregular size and shapes are used and there
• Possibility of moisture entering the building is are no regular courses is known as
effectively prevented. (a) Uncoursed rubble massonry
• Sound insulation is also improved. (b) Coursed rubble masonry
• Thermal insulation of the building is improved (c) Random rubble masonry
by 25 %. (d) Dry rubble masonry
6. The rocks which are formed due to cooling of
magma at a relatively shallow depth from the
earth's surface are called
(a) Plutonic rocks (b) Hypabyssal rocks
(c) Volcanic rocks (d) Ignoeous rocks

[ 25 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

7. The natural beding plane of stones and the (c) Volcanic rocks (d) Igneous rocks
direction of pressure in stone masonry is- 17. Pick up the volcanic rock from the following
(a) At 45o (b) Parallel
(c) At 30 o
(d) Normal (a) Granite (b) Dolerite
8. It is a metal connection employed in stone (c) Basalt (d) All the above
masonary construction. What is it ? 18. Under heat and pressure, granite can transform
(a) Cornice (b) Bed Joint
into
(c) Corbal (d) Cramp
9. Hardness of the rock can be tested insitu using (a) Quartzite (b) Marble

(a) Smith's test (c) Slate (d) Gneiss

(b) Schmidt Hammer test 19. Which of the following is the reason for the
decrease in the use of stones as building material
(c) Acid test
?
(d) Crystallization test
(a) Steel and R.C.C are less bulky and more
10. Which of the following is a Rock ?
durable
(a) Quartz (b) Mica
(b) Strength of stones cannot be rationally
(c) Gypsum (d) None of the above analysed
11. The most suitable stone for building piers is (c) Stones are not easily available in plains
(a) Granite (b) Limestone (d) All options are correct
(c) Marble (d) Sandstone 20. Shingle is
12. A course of stone provided immediately below (a) Water bound pebbles
a cornice is called
(b) Disintegrated laterite
(a) Blocking course (b) Coping
(c) Crushed granite
(c) Frieze (d) Parapet
(d) None of these
13. A course of stone masory provided immediately
above the cornice, is called 21. Pick up the plutonic rock from the following
(a) Blocking course (b) Coping (a) Granite (b) Dolerite
(c) Frieze (d) Parapet (c) Basalt (d) All the abve
14. The rocks which are formed due to cooling of 22. Pick up the hypabyssal rock from the follwing
magma at a considerable depth from earth's (a) Granite (b) Dolerite
surface are called (c) Basalt (d) All the above
(a) Plutonic rocks 23. The sub-classification of sedi-mentary
(b) Hypabyssal rocks rocks_______.
(c) Volcanic rocks (a) Volcanic and plutonic
(d) Igneous rocks (b) Mechanical, Chemical, Organic
15. In the first class coursed rubble masonry (c) Intrusive, extrusive
(a) All the course are of the same height (d) Stratified, un-stratified
(b) The length of the quoin is generally kept 24. Which of the following is NOT a tool used for
450 mm
dressing stones ?
(c) Minimum height of the course is limited to
(a) Face hammer (b) Mallet
150 mm '
(c) Crow chiesel (d) Point chiesel
(d) All the above
16. The rocks which are formed due to pouring of 1(*).
magma at the earth's surface are called
(a) Plutonic rocks (b) Hypabyssal rocks

[ 26 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

Physical can be easily split. This plane is known as natural

Classification bed.
 In stone masonry, the stones are placed in position
Stratified Unstratified such that the natural bedding plane is normal to
Rock Rock the direction of pressure they carry
Rock showed Does not showing
layered structure layered structure Types of work Direction of
can not easily split natural bed
Ex. into thin slabs. Masonry wall Horizontal
1. Sand stone Ex. direction
2. Lime stone  Arches Radial direction
1. Granite
3. Slate Cornice/string course Vertical direction
2. Trap
4. Marble
8(d). Cramp: Metal connection used in stone
masonary.
Foliated Rocks
· Metamorphic rocks are Corbel: A corbel is a projecting stone which is usually
generally foliated rocks provided to serve as support for roof truss, beam,

·They have the tendency to weather sheds.
split along a definitedirection. Cornice: A cornice is a course of stone provided at
· Their direction are not the top of wall. It is weathered and throated to dispose
parallel to each other as in case
of stratified rocks. off rain water.

Joist Parapet wall

2(a). A good building stone water absorption capac-
ity should not exceed 5% of the self weight. Weathering
Wall Cornice
3(b). Jumper:- It is used for making hole in rock.
plate
4(b). Throating

5(a).
Wall

Type of Rubble Masonry Description Suitability Corbel Cornice

Random rubble 1. Stones are laid to somewhat level course This type of masonry is used to construct residential
with non-uniform joints. buildings, godowns, boundary walls etc.
2. Irregular shaped stones with non-uniform 9(b).
joints.
3. Stones are either hammer dressed or chiesel Test Purpose
dressed.
Un-coursed rubble masonry 1. Roughest & cheapest This type of stone masonry is used for constructing walls of Smith test for presence of soluble
2. Stones are laid without forming course low height in case of ordinary buildings. matter
3. Stones are of different shape & size.
Coursed rubble masonry 1. The face stones are squared on all joints Coursed rubble masonry is mostly used for residential &
Brad’s test frost resistance (durability)
and bedded by hammer or chisel dressing hospitals, public buildings, markets, modern residential Acid test To check weather resistance
before laying them in courses. buildings, piers, abutments, etc. and in hilly area where a Hardness test Mohs scale
2. Joints are roughly uniform and are . good quality of stone is easily & cheaply available.
broken vertically.
3. Superior variety of rubble masonry 10(c). A Rock is an aggregate of one or more miner-
Dry rubble masonry 1. Stones are laid without using any This type of rubble masonry is extensively used for als. Like as Granite is composed of three minerals
mortar. retaining walls, compound walls, pitching on bridge
2. Cheapest type of rubble masonry approaches etc. It is recommended that the height of
Feldspar, Quartz and Mica.
retaining walls to be built in this masonry should not be more  A mineral is a naturally occurring, inorganic solid
than 6 m. If the height exceeds 6 m, three adjacent courses
are laid in coursed rubble masonry in mortar at 6 m intervals. with a definite chemical composition & a
crystalline structure formed by geological
process.
E.g. Mica, Quartz, Gypsum, Calcite, Diamond,
6(b). Topaz etc.
7(d). Building stones are obtained from rocks which 11(a). Uses of stones:
have distinct planes of divisions along which stones
(a) Abutment & Pier- Granite

[ 27 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

(b) Damp proof course/roofing material- slate Metamorphism

(c) Ornamental/carving work-Marble, sand stone Granite Igneous Gneiss

Basalt Igneous Schist
(d) Flooring work: Limestone, Marble, sand stone Limestone/Marl Sedimentary Marble
(e) Facing work: Granite, Marble, sandstone Mudstone/Shale Sedimentary Slate
Sandstone Sedimentary Quartzite
12(c). Frieze: A course of stone provided immedi-
ately below cornice is called frieze. Example of ar- 19(d).
chitectural frieze is on facade of a building, the oc- 20(*). Right answer is none of these.
tagonal tower of the winds. It is used to improve ap-
pearance of wall. Shingle are widely used as roof covering on residen-
tial buildings & they are made up of asphalt, roof,
slate and disintegrated laterite. They are attached
Weathering
in overlapping courses.
 Shingle is produced from washing ballast & is
one of the graded gravels. They are perfect
for paths, driveways, flower beds, & a veriety
Throating
of other landscaping purposes.
Wall 21(a).

Igneous rocks

Coping: A coping is a coarse of stone which laid at Volcanic (Extrusive) Plutonic (Intrusive)
the top wall so as to protect the wall from rain water.
 These are formed at  These are formed
13(a).
the earth surface beneath the earth
14(a). after cooling and surface after cooling

Igneous rocks crystallization of and crystallization of

Magma. Magma

Volcanic (Extrusive) Plutonic (Intrusive)  e.g. Basalt, Andesite,  e.g. Granite, Gabbro
Rhyolite Diorite, Pegmatite
 These are formed at  These are formed 22(b).
the earth surface beneath the earth
23(b).
after cooling and surface after cooling
Sub classification of sedimentary rocks
crystallization of and crystallization of
Magma. Magma 1. Mechanical (Clastic Rock)
 e.g. Basalt, Andesite,  e.g. Granite, Gabbro Eg. Made from mechanical weathering
Rhyolite Diorite, Pegmatite
3. Organic Rocks
15(d). 2. Chemical (Non-clastic Rock)
16(c) Similar to question no. 14 Eg. Made from chemical weathering lime stone.
17(c). 24(c).
Extrusive igneous (Volcanic) rocks Dressing of stones: Dressing of stones is
 When magma is reached at the earth surface performed to achieve following objectives
,then it is called lava. (a) To obtained desired appearance
(b) To increase the properties of stone such as
 When lava is cooling & they cool quickly to from
durability & strength.
small crystals, then extrusive igneous (Volcanic) (c) To suit the requirements of stone masonary.
Rocks formed. (d) To reduce the transportation & handling cost
Ex. Basalt, Pumice, Rhyolite, Dacite. of stones
Crow chiesel, face hammer & point chiesel are used
18(d).
for cutting & dressing of stones.
Ro ck Classification Rock after

[ 28 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

(a) Plumb bob (b) Water level

1. Which of the following type of stone (c) Trowel (d) Line and pins
masonry used irregular size and shape ? 8. Which bond is mostly used for
[NCVT 2018] construction work ?
(a) Coursed rubble masonry [NCVT 2015]
(b) Uncoursed rubble masonry (a) Garden wall bond (b) Flemish bond
(c) Dry rubble masonry (c) Stretcher bond (d) English bond
(d) Random rubble masonry 1. (d) 2. (d) 3. (b) 4. (b) 5 .
2. Which chisel should never be used (a) 6. (c) 7. (a) 8. (d)
with a mallet ?
[NCVT 2018]
(a) Firmer chise (b) Gauge chisel
(c) Mortise chisel (d) Paring chisel BRICK
3. Instrument used to break the brick is
- Basic Information About Brick -
 Standard size = 19 cm × 9 cm × 9 cm
[NCVT 2018]
 Nominal size (with mortar) = 20 cm × 10 cm ×10
(a) nail (b) hammer cm
(c) trowel (d) spirit level  Traditional bricks = 9" × 4.5" × 3" (23 cm × 11.4
cm× 7.6 cm)
4. The type of masonry in which the
 Frog (indent in the brick) = 10 cm × 4 cm × 1cm
stones of irregular size and shape are used
 Frog is provided on top surface and it is useful in
and there are no regular course is called -
key joint between mortar and brick.
[NCVT 2017]  Weight of 1 m3 of brick = 1800 kg
(a) uncoursed rubble masonry  Avg. weight of the brick = 3 kg to 3.5 kg
 No. of bricks using 1m3 brick work = 500
(b) uncoursed random rubble masonry
 The minimum thickness of brick wall is 100mm
(c) polygonal rubble masonry  The density of bricks should be 1700 to 1900 kg/
(d) all of these m3
5. An external corner in brick masonry is Comparison between Bricks and Stone
called- 1. Brick resist more fire than stones & also resist
[NCVT 2017] other atomspheric effects in a better way. Dead
load of brick masonary is less.
(a) quoin (b) jamb
2. It is easy to construct openings in brick
(c) sleeper wall (d) parapet masonary.
6. Composite masonry is one in which 3. Brick work is cheaper, requires less skilled
different type of mortar are used on labour & no complicated lifting device.
_______ of walls. 4. In brick work mortar joint are thin, hence more
durable.
[NCVT 2016] 5. Brick work is less water tight & absorbs more
(a) facing (b) backing moisture.
(c) both (a) and (b) (d) none of these 6. Stone work is stronger, gives solid appearance,
attractive in texture.
7. Which of the following tool is used for In stone masonary, mortar required is more to
checking the vertical level of a masonry fill the voids.
wall ? Life of stone masonary is more as compared to
[NCVT 2016] brick masonary.

[ 29 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

 Laterite soil: Iron oxide gives red or pink colour.

SAND It is residual soil formed from basalt. It is soft &
Sand particle consist of small grain of silica (SiO2). It can be cut with knife.
is formed from sandstone's decomposition due to vari-  Desert soil: It is uniform in gradation (ex. dune
ous effects of weather. sand). It is Non-plastic & highly pervious.
According to natural source of sand, it is classified  Loam: It is the mixture of sand, silt & clay.
into following types-  Caliche: It is the mixture of gravel, sand & silt.
1. Pit Sand - It is obtained by forming pit into soil.  Marine soil: It has low shearing strength, highly
 It consist of sharp angular grain. compressible, soft & highly plastic.
 Excavated from a depth of about 1 - 2 m from  Peat: It is the organic soil with fibrous aggregates
the ground level. formed from vegetable matter in excess moisture
 If it is free from salts, excellent material for mor- (ex. in swamps), highly compressible. It is not
tar or concrete work. suitable for foundation.
2. River Sand - It is obtained from bank or bed of  Bentonite: It is formed from volcanic ash. It has
river. high percentage of Montomorillonite.
 Its colour is almost white.
 It consist of fine rounded grains.
3. Sea Sand - It is obtained from sea shores. CLAY PRODUCTS
 Its colour is light brown
Clay products, which are also called
 It is consist of fine rounded grains.
 It contain salts. So, its use is avoided for engi-
ceramic, are now-a-days used in building construction
neering work. work. It is used in the construction of products made
Special Point : Nala is not a good source of good of clay, such as bricks, tile terracotta, drain pipe etc.
All these components are prepared from naturally
quality sand due to the presence of impurities (spe-
obtained minerals. Products made clay are popular
cially organic impurity), which may cause detrimen-
due to their load carrying capacity, resistance to
tal effect on the engineering works. corrosion, pleasing appearance etc.
According to size of grain-
Fine sand : It is the sand passing through a screen This is a fine particle of clay substance that is
with clear opening of 1.5875 mm. It is mainly used obtained from natural rocks. They are mixed with
for plastering one or more minerals (metal oxide or carbonic
Coarse sand : It is the sand passing through a screen elements) and converted into required shape by
with clear opening of 3.175 mm. It is mainly used for adding water. There-after, they are backed in kilns
masonry work. to give permanent strength to the mixture of clay.
Gravity sand : It is the sand passing through a
They are plastic due to their water ingredients and
screen with clear opening of 7.62 mm.Generally It is
become non-brittle and hard upon drying and baking.
used for concrete work.
They are used in building contruction.They are also
Various types of Soil used to make bricks, tiles, pottery, etc. Products
 Alluvial soil: Low density & liable to liquefaction made of clay are called clayproducts. This is a type
in earthquake prone areas. of sedimentary material whose particles are less than
 Black cotton soil: Residual deposits form basalt 0.002 mm in diameter.
or trap rocks, contain clay mineral. Very poor
bearing capacity (50-100 kN/m2). Classification of Clay Product
 If depth of layer of B.C.S. is shallow, Then re- Clay is classified according to the fired intensity
move its layer for making structure. of the prepared ingredients or product. Fired intensity
 If depth of layer of BCS is Deep, then we use refers to placing the clay on fire or working on fire,
under-reamed piles In foundation for making struc- which is done in the following manner -
ture.
 Generally we use raft foundation in BCS. 1. Terracotta - Terracotta is a special type of
 Black cotton soil have high shrinkage & swelling backed clay which is used for constructing bricks
characteristics, its shearing strength is extremely and tiles construction. However, since the clay is
low. It is due to Montmorillonite mineral. uniform therefore, it is prepared carefully in controlled
temperature and conditions. In some places of

[ 78 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

building such as walls, poles etc. terracotta is used 2. It is used instead of stone in make - up
instead of stone for decoration, Terracotta is material.
prepared by mixing white sand, glass powder, broken 2. Earthenware - These are not completely
pieces of china clay (kaolinite) and some other glazed and porous vessels made of clay which are
elements, and then baking them. To prepare porous generally glazed. Most vessels made of clay that are
terracotta some wood fillings or ground cork is added placed on tables or used as culinary often belong to
to its mixture that burns during baking, thereby this category. Ordinary clay is used to produce
making the terracotta porous. earthenware on a small scale, whereas for good
Manufacturing of Terracotta quality and white vessels kaoline sand, felspar and
To prepare terracotta, 8 parts of special sand, 3 flint is used. To achieve a porous biscuit the ratio of
parts of powdered sugar, 2 parts of white sand and flux should be minimum so that it is absorbed in
1 part of glass powder are mixed thoroughly inside maximum when mixed in the glazing solution. For the
a pug mill so that the mixture can be easily moulded same reason, its baking temperature is kept between
in a desired shape. Clay prepared in this way in 1100°C and 1200°C. Lead and lead boro-silicate is
moulded in a desired shape either by hand or using used for glazing earthenware.
machines. After moulding, the moulded objects are Those products of clay whose firing temperature
placed in shade for drying. After the objects dry, they is the lowest compared to other products are called
are suspended in a thin solution of clay felspar or earthenware. These are soft and brittle.
flint and taken out. This forms a thin layer of this Earthenware is most common type of clay found in
solution on the objects.There-after, objects made of nature. It is used for making tiles, bricks and clay
terracotta clay are baked in contact with the hot vessels. The amount of iron and mineral impurities
gases inside the kiln. Production of terracotta is present in earthenware are sufficient to help it bake
mainly done in two ways - completely. Generally, clay is baked at 1300°F to
(i) Structural Terracotta - This type of 2120°F. It's color can be brown, black or red
terracotta is used to make curtains, wall blocks, 3. Stoneware - These are also products made
cornice, blocks for decoration, slopes, bricks of of clay, but unlike earthenware they are not porous,
arches etc. and these are stronger, harder,more resistant to
(ii) Architectural Terracotta - This type of chemical reactions, and impermeable as compared
terracotta is used to make different types of blocks to earthenware. Inferoin quality stoneware is made
for decoration and other objects. by ordinary claywhich has 76% silica and 24%
alumina. These are glazed using salt glaze. The
Advantages of Terracotta
additives required for making the best quality and
1. This is a cheap, strong and durable material. white stoneware type of earthenware are prepared
2. It is available in differnt colors. by blending, but they have a high proportion of flux
3. It can be easily moulded in the desired shape. and the baking temmperature is kept between
1200°C and 1300°C. Chemical stoneware is a fully
4. It is fire resistant and can be easily used in
glazed material which has 30% to 60% of (soft) clay
RCC work.
soil, 5% to 25% of felspar, 30% to 60% of silica.
5. It is light in weight. It can be easily cleaned. Chemical stoneware is used to make vessels that can
6. It is not affected by any acids or store corrosive materials and fumes. Stoneware is
environmental agents/factors. mostly used in making sanitary wares, stoneware
Disadvantages of Terracotta pipes, basins, dirty sails, glazed bricks, stones and
walls, and clean tiles etc. Stoneware taps are used
1. It shrinks and twists upon drying and baking.
in building in the form of a pipe. Stoneware contains
2. It can not be fixed/set white work is in almost 2% - 5% of clay and it is baked at a
progress. It can be fixed after the work is completed. temperature of 2100°F to 2372°F . Upon completely
Us es baking stoneware, it becomes free of leakage and
1. It is used in all type of jewellry work. cracks. This is hard with a dense surface and found

[ 79 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

in various colors. Higher the time stoneware is kept again heated at 1300°C (white flame). This heat is
in fire, higher will be the strength and durability of maintained for 3 hours. Then it is slaked for 6 hours
the products. and again heated. In the end, all the fuel is filled in
4. Porcelain - Porcelain is a ceramic substance the kiln, its doors are closed by mud, and the products
in which the clay is in the from of Kaolin. They are are allowed to bake completely till the kiln cools
prepared by baking in kilns at a temperature. of down. The kiln is allowed to cool slowly. This process
1200°C to 1400°C. Iron containing glazed is used for of baking products takes almost 72 hours.
glazed the porcelain.
Porcelain has absorption capacity of 0-1%. It's
main constituent is Kaolin which is also called China
clay. Porcelain has a melting point of 3275°F and due
to its low plasticity, it is difficult to be moulded in
different forms and shape. Porcelain is obtained by
mixing kaolin with other substances that reduce its
melting point. Porcelain is dense, hard and clean and
is made of fine particles.
Preparation of Clay Products
Clay products are prepared in the following
manner -
1. Preparation of Clay - For this purpose, first
the selected clay is free of impurities and it is ground
into fine powder by pug mills. Then, sufficient amount
of water is mixed in the fine powder in order to
prepare a high quality product. This mixture is
properly mixed in the tank and then allowed to rest
so that the big and heavy particles settle at the
botttom of the tank. Fine particles are taken to
another tank and is lift to dry. This clay is used after
this procedure.
2. Moulding - Next, the clay product is put in
the mould in order to give it a shape. This clay is
moulded in the mould either using a wooden mould,
a machanical machine, or a potter's wheel.
3. Drying - After removing the products from
the mould, they are placed in shade to dry for two
days. This treats the cracks and warping in the
product.
4. Burning - The products are baked in
'Cellcoat Kilis'.These are square shaped and shady.
This burns woods for fuel. Above this fuel, bricks
are set at some distance from each other. Dry
products are set above the layer of bricks. Kiln doors
are closed by mud. In the beginning, the flames is
kept low which makes the products loose moisture.
Then, its temperature is raised to 800°C (white
flame). Next, it is slaked for 6 hours and thereafter

[ 80 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

 I.S. code recommendation for cement paint is

CIVIL Ki GOLI Team (9255624029)
IS:5410
Varnish  Aluminium paint: It has shining & visible in
 Varnish is a nearly homogenous solution of resin dark. It is corrosion & weather resistance, wa-
in oil, alcohol or turpentine. ter proof etc. It is used for wood & metal work.
 The surface looks after the varnish glossy. Varnish  Bronze paint: It has high reflective property.
provides a protective coating without substantially It is used as radiator.
changing the color of the surface.  Cellulose paint is a normally used by enthusiast,
 The type of solvent depends upon the type of resin first timer or trade professionals when an original
used. finish is required. This paint can produce any flat
 The oil dries with time & other solvents evaporate colour & needs only thinners added to it prior to
leaving behind a solid transparent resin film over painting.
the surface.  Duco paints are cellulose paints. It is used for
• Drier in varnish is litharge. painting, motor car, aeroplane, etc.
Types of varnish  Asbestos paints: Asbestos was very inexpen-
sive and was used as
(a) Spirit Varnish: It uses resin of soft variety such
as lac or shellac dissolved in spirit. It dries very filler in many different products in different
quickly. industries.
 These are not durable & easily affected by  Asbestos was widely used in ‘fireproof’ paints.
weathering action.  Fluorescent paint: It gives illumination during
 Spirit varnish is made from spirit & Wax nights.
(b) Water varnish: It is shellac resin dissolved in  Enamel paint :-It contain vehicles (Binding
hot water to which enough quantity of either Material) like as styrene, polyvinyl lacetate, alkyd
borax, ammonia, soda is added. resin etc. It dries quickly (1.5 to 2) hour.
 These are used for varnishing maps &
 Caesin Paints:- It can be applied on walls, wall
pictures.
board, ceilings etc. to improve appearance. Caesin
(c) Oil varnish: It uses linseed oil & takes about (a protein substance extracted from milk curd), is
24 hours to dry. mixed with a base consisting of white pigments, to
 It is suitable for interior & exterior surfaces. form pasty/powder form paint.
 Hard resin such as amber, copal etc are used
which makes this type of varnish most Defects in Painting
durable. (a) Blistering: It is the defect caused due to the
(d) Spar varnish: It derives its name from its use fomation of bubbles under film of water paint.
on spars & other parts of ship. The bubbles are formed by water vapours
(e) Flat varnish: Materials such as wax, metallic trapped behind the painted surface.
(b) Running: This defect occur when the surface
soap on finely divided silica when added to
to be painted is too smooth due to this the paint
varnish produce a dull appearance on drying.
runs back & leaves small area of the surface
(f) Asphalt varnish: It is made by dissolving uncovered.
melted hard asphalt in linseed oil with a thinner (c) Craling or sagging: This defect occurs due to
such as petroleum or turpentine spirit. the application of too thick paint.
 It is used over shop fabricated steel works. (d) Bloom: In this defect dull patches are formed
 A cement paint is a water based paint is used to on finished polished surface. This may be either
preventing water penetrating redemption of dirt due to defect in paints or due to bad ventilation.
collection prevent fungal & algal growth on interior (e) Fading: This is the gradual loss of color of paints
and exterior walls. due to effect of sunlight on pigments of paints.
(f) Flashing: It is the formation of glossy patches
 It usually contain hydrated lime, 5% to 10% colour on the painted surface resulting from bad work-
pigments & are prepared with white cement. No manship cheap paint or weather action.
oil is used in it. (g) Flaking: Flaking is the dislocation or lossening
 It is durable & water resistant. of some portion of the painted surface resulting
 Its covering capacity is about 4m2/ kg per coat. It from a poor adhesion.
is standard. (h) Grinning: This defect is caused when the sur-

[ 81 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

face final coat does not have sufficient opacity seed oil in the various parts. It has similar tex-
so that background is clearly seen. ture to clay. It is used for filling holes,
(i) Saponification: This is the formation of soap microcracks etc. It is used in domestic con-
patches on the painted surface due to chemical struction & repair as a sealant & filler due to
action of alkalis. it’s high plasticity characteristics.
Various constituents of an oil paint are:  Resin is a natural or synthetic organic compound
(a) Base: It is metallic oxide which is the principal having a non-crystalline or viscous liquid
constituent of a paint.
substance.Natural resins are yellowish to brown
Most common base used for timber painting is
white lead & for iron & steel surface is red in colour. These are typically fusible & flam-
lead mable organic substances that are transparent
It makes the paint film opaque & possesses or translucent.. They are formed in plant secre-
binding properties which reduces the shrinkage
cracks in the film on drying. tions & are soluble in various organic liquids like
(b) Vehicle: It is also known as binder or carrier as spirit but not soluble in water. They are used
or drying oil as varnishes & left behind on evaporation of oil.
 It is an oil to which base is mixed.  Terpentine oil are also used to clean brushes
 It holds the constituents of paints in
& other tools.
suspension & helps spread it over the surface
to be painted. · Peeling is the complete dislocation of
 It gives durability, toughness & water some portion of plastered
proofness & resistance to weathering. surface, resulting in the formation of a patch.
 Linseed oil, poppy oil, tung oil, animal oils • Thermocol is a very light, cellular plastic.
are examples of vehicle. • The compressive strength of thermocol varies
(c) Solvents: These are oils used to thin the paints, from 117 - 144 kg/cm2 .
increase the spread. Also called thinner. Ex. • It resist dampness.It is light, strong and durable.
Naptha, Spirit, Petroleum, Turpentine oil.
• It is used in acoustic treatment and lining of
(d) Pigments: It is used to hide the surface
ceiling and walls.
imperfections & to impart the desired colour.
• It is an excellent insulating material of heat, sound
Name of pigment Colour and electricity.
Zinc oxide White
Copper sulphate Green PLASTICS
Burnt siena Brown Plastic is an artificial product. Plastic is obtained
Indigo Blue from petroleum. It is generally made by mixing two,
Ivory black Black or more than two constituents. Plastic is used in the
Red lead Red from of engineering material because it has the
desired qualities. Plastic is a compound of carbon and
Special Points:
other elements such as, hydrogen, nitrogen and
The drier in an oil paint should not be more
oxygen etc. It can be easily moulded into any shape.
than 10% (by volume)
It is transparent like glass.
 Gypsum is an insulating material & used as
sound proof material Properties of Plastic
 Gypsum is composed of calcium sulphate & Plastic has the following properties -
di-hydrate
1. Chemical Resistance - Plastic are
 Density of gypsum is 2960 kg/cum
extremely resistant to chemical reactions, solvents
 Galvanized iron pipe is used for making drink-
and moisture. Its resistance to chemical reactions
ing water pipes
 Sewer pipes are made of stoneware depends upon its composition. Some plastics are
 The amount of water used for one kg of dis- extremely resistant to corrosion. For this reason,
temper is 0.6 litre. plastics are used to carry chemical substances.
 Putty is traditionally made by mixing a base of 2. Appearance - Some plastics appear to be
whiting (finally powdered chalk) with the lin- completely transparent. Plastic can be made colourful,

[ 82 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

beautiful, opaque and attractive by mixing suitable (A) Thermosetting Plastic - This plastic once
colours pigment in it. moulded, does not become soft upon heating. Thus,
3. Ductility - Plastic has very low ductility and they are strong, hard and durable. Example -
therefore, there is a risk of their sudden failure. polyesters, phenol formldehyde, epoxides.

4. Electric Insulation - Plastics has good (B) Thermoplastic - This type of plastic
insulating properties. Therefore, it is better than other becomes soft when heated and hard upon cooling.
standard insulators. In order to obtain chemical dissolution of plastics, the
process of softening and hardening of plastic is
5. Durebility - Plastics are very durable if their
repeated several times. The plastic can be used for
surface is hard.
the manufacturing of various products by application
6. Finishing - Any type of finishing can be done of suitable pressure and heat. Example -
on a plastic surface. polyethylene, polystyrene, polyvinyl chloride etc.
7. Fire Resistance - All plastics, because they 2. Plastic According to Structure
are carbonic materials, are flammable. However,
Plastic is of two types according to its structure
depending upon the composition some of the plastics
-
are fire resistant. PVC in an example of such type
of plastic. (A) Heterogenous - The chain of this type of
plastic has carbon, oxygen, nitrogen and other types
8. Fixing - Plastic can be easily fixed in the
of particles.
desired position using bolt, clamp, screw,etc
(B) Homogenous - The chain of this type of
9. Maintenance - Plastic surfaces do not
plastic has only carbon particles.
require paint for their protection. Therefore, plastic
has an easy and economical maintenance. Plastic According to Physical and
Mechanical Properties
10. Humidity - To some extent, the properties
of plastic are affected by moisture. The strength of Based upon the physical and machanical
plastics with cellulose material is greatly affected by properties plastics are following type -
moisture whereas PVC plastics are moisture (i) Hard Plastic - Plastics having a high modulus
resistant. of elasticticity, and at standard temperature, the
11. Melting Point - Most plastics have very low shape of which is not affected by high stress are
melting point. Some plastics melt at only 50°C. To called hard plastic.
use plastic at a high temperature, glass reinforcement (ii) Semi-hard Plastic - Plastic that have a
is used in this. moderate modulus of elasticity and retain their shape
12. Strength - Plastic is very strong. Also, some when stress is removed from them are called semi-
fibrous materials can be mixed to increase its hard plastic.
strength. (iii) Soft Plastic - Plastics that have a low
13. Optical Property - Some plastics are modulus of elasticity and can not retain their original
transparent and translucent. shape, when stress is removed from them are called
soft plastic.
14. Sound Absorption - Sound absorption
boards can be made by mixing glass fiber in phenol (iv) Elastomer - These are soft plastics with a
resin. low modulus of elasticity. Their is ten times their
basic measurement.
15. Thermal Quality - Plastic has very low
thermal quality almost equal to that of wood. Uses of Plastics

Classification of Plastic The uses of plastics are as follows -

The classification of plastic is as follows - Uses in Household Works

1. Plastic According to Heating Plastic has the following uses in household work
-
Plastic according to heating are as follows-
1. For making bath tub and sink

[ 83 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

2. For making a concrete low land and water and it result into adaptation of smaller size of
resistant layer PVC pipes compared to other conventional
3. For making tank valve float materials.

4. For making floors without joints (c) They have no problems of incurstation

5. For making pipes for cold water (d) They possess low coefficient of expansion
as compared to cast-iron or galvanized-iron
6. In electrical fittings
pipes.
7. For making paint and varnish
SSC JE Civil 29.10.2020 (Morning)
Uses in Building Industry
Ans. (d) PVC pipes are becoming popular day by
Plastic has the followng uses in household work- day due to the following advantages-
1. For making PVC pipes • Good insulation properties
2. For making PVC windows and doors. These • No problem of incrustation
are used extensively because they are anti-corrosive,
• Permits high, smooth and undiminished flow of
water-resistant, decay resistant, and resistant to
water.
chemical reactions.
• Economical and resistive to various chemical
Q. Polymerization is the process of
attacks.
(a) combine monomers to form a large chain-
• Have high hazen williams constant and it results
like molecule
in smaller sizes of PVC pipes as computed to
(b) combine monomers to form a small chain- other materials.
like molecule
Disadvantages of PVC pipes are-
(c) break a polymer into a number of small
• They can not resist high temperature as they are
monomers
basically thermo-plastic.
(d) break a polymer to form into a number of
• They posses a higher coefficient of expansion
long monomers
as compared to other materials.
Ans. (a) Polymerization
• Lesser strength as compared to cast-iron or
• Polymerization is a process of bonding monomer, galvanized iron.
or "single units' together through a variety of
Q. Plastic can be broadly classified as:
reaction mechanisms to form longer chains
named polymer. (a) Monomers and polymers

Q. The process of producing resins of plastic (b) Thermosetting and thermoplastic

is called as: (c) Soft and hard
(a) solar control (d) Elastic and Rigid
(b) hydration Ans. (b)
(c) glass wool Q. Plastic are of following types:
(d) polymerization (a) Thermo-Plastic
MH Kolhapur MNC 2017 (b) Thermo-Setting Plastic
Ans. (d) (c) Both (a) and (b)
Q. Which of the following is NOT true about (d) None of the above
PVC pipes? UPSSSC JE 2017 (PTCUL, UPCL)
(a) They have good insulation properties. Hence Ans. (c) Plastics can be divided into two main type
the temperature of water passing through such categories.
pipes is not effected by outside temperature
(b) They posses high Hazen Williams Constant

[ 84 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

polymers but not all polymers are plastic. Plastic

polymers consist of chains of linked subunits
called monomers. It identical monomers are
Thermoset or
Thermo Plastics joined, it forms a homopolymer. Different
Thermosetting plastic
monomers link to form copolymers.
Once cooled and
hardened, these plastics Q. PVC stands for
It can soften upon
retain their shapes and (a) Plastic very compact
heating and return to
cannot return to their (b) polythene vinyl carbon
their original form
original form. (c) polythene vandium carbide
These are less rigid
They are hard and
than thermosets and are (d) polyvinyl chloride
durable
exruded in to films, Mizoram PSC JE (RRD) 2016 Paper-I
It can be used for auto
fibers and packaging.
parts, aircraft parts and TNPSC JE/Supervisor 2012
tires. KPCL JE 2012
Mizoram PSC JE 26 March 2010 Paper-I
Ans. (d) Polyvinyl chloride, also known as polyvinyl
Q. Plastic asphalt is ..... or vinyl, commonly abbreviated PVC is the word
is third most widely produced synthetic plastic
(a) used water proofing layer over roof
polymer, after polythylene and polyropylene,
(b) a mixture of cement and asphalt
PVC comes in two basic forms rigid and flexible.
(c) natural asphalt
Q. Which of these is used in production of
(d) a refinery asphalt plastics?
MH Nashik ZP 2014 (a) Mercury (b) Lead
SSC JE 2008 (c) Vinyl chloride (d) None of these
Ans. (b) Plastic Asphalt: An asphalt concrete or MECOM AE 2017
paving material includes from 5-20% or more of
Ans. (c) Polynyl chloride is an economical and
granular recycled plastic, which supplement or
versatile thermoplastic polymer widely used in
replaces the rock aggregate components of the
building and construction industry to produce
mixture.
door and window profiles, proper wire and cable
Plastic asphalt generally mixture of cement and insulation, medical devices etc.
asphalt.
Q. Choose the Thermoplastic type of polymers
Q. The type of plastic used for moisture proof from the followings;
packings, is —————
(a) Epoxies (b) Polypropylene
(a) Polystyrene (b) Poly vinyl chloride
(c) Polystyrene (d) Vinylester
(c) Arylic (d) Polythene
Mizoram PSC JE PWD 2018 Paper-I
UKSSSC JE 20.12.2020 Morning
Ans. (b and (c)
Ans. (d) Polythene-It is a type of plastic used for
Thermoplastic Examples include polythylene,
moisture proof packing.
polypropylene, polyviny chloride, polystyrene
Q. Plastics are the examples of polybenzimidazole, .....
(a) anhydrides (b) polymeric materials Q. Plastics which become rigid when moulded
(c) elastomers (d) ceramic materials at suitable pressure and temperature are
DSSB JE 4.11.2019, Afternoon (a) Monomers (b) Thermo-plastics
Ans. (b) Properties of Plastic: All plastics are (c) Heterogeneous plastics

[ 85 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

(d) Thermo-setting plastics iron, wrought iron, cast iron, steel & alloys
MIZORAM PSC JE 2015, PAPER I 2. Non ferrous metals: Commonly used non
ferrous metals are aluminium, copper etc. These
Ans. (d) Thermo-setting plastic can not be reused. metals are obtained by processing the iron ores
The thermosetting plastic becomes rigid when mined from the earth. Important varieties of iron
moulded at suitable pressure and temperature. ores are
Q. The specific gravity of plastic generally lies (1) Haematite - Fe2O3 (65-70 % of iron)
between (2) Pyrite - FeS2 (45% of iron)
(3) Magnetite - Fe3O4 (70-73% of iron)
(a) 0.1 to 0.5 (b) 0.5 to 1.0
(4) Limonite - 2Fe2O3.3H2O (60% of iron)
(c) 1.0 to 1.3 (d) 1.3 to 1.4 (5) Siderite - FeCO3 (40% of iron)
HPSSC JE Code 463/2018
Ans. (d) The specific gravity of plastic generally lies
between 1.3 to 1.4. S. No. Alloy Steel Composition Properties Uses
1. Stainless steel Chromium - 16% 1. acid and rust proof. Ball bearings, dies,
2. high elastic & crushing machines,
Plastic Specific gravity ultimate strength razors
PVC 1.35  1.45 3. very hard & tough
2. Tungsten steel Tungsten 14-20% 1. high cutting hardness Drilling machine, high
Polyester 1.38  1.39
2. resistance to abrasion speed tools
Nylon 66 1.13  1.15 3. Nickel steel Nickel - 3.5% 1. high tensile strength Automobile and air plane
Teflon 2.1  2.2 2. more elastic parts
3. less brittle than
mildsteel
Q. In which color is P.V.C. pipe made? 4. Improved hardness
ductility
(a) Black (b) White 4. Vanadium steel Vanadium - 0.1 to 1. high tensile & High speed tools,
(c) Light and Dark (d) All of the above 2% yield strength locomotives, casting auto
2. has resistance to parts, chassis
GSSSBITI SUpervisor 27.03.2016 softening at high
temperature
Ans. (d) Thermo-setting plastic can not be reused.
5. Manganese steel Manganese 12 - 1. hard, tough & strong Point & crossing in
The thermosetting plastic becomes rigid when 15% railways, rollers, jaw
moulded at suitable pressure and temperature. crusher, heavy earth &
mining equipment
Steel 6. Invar steel Nickel 30 - 40% Low coefficient of Delicate instruments
 Vanadium steel is normally used in the manufacture (36%) thermal expansion
of Axles & springs. 7. Molybdenum steel Molybdenum 0.2 1. maintain tensile Gears, Axles, Shafts.
to 0.3% strength at high
 Manganese steel is used in manufacture of rails.
temperature
Physical properties of steel
Various physical properties of structural steel are
given below.
Unit mass of steel,  = 7850 kg/m3
Modulus of elasticity, E = 2 × 105 N/mm2
modulus of rigidity, G = 0.769 × 105 N/mm2 Manufacturing of steel
Poisson ratio,  = 0.3 The process commonly used for manufacturing of
Coefficient of thermal expansion,  = 12 × 10–6/ steel are
ºC (1) Bessemer Process
Metals can be grouped in the following two (2) Open hearth process
categories. (3) Crucible steel process
1. Ferrous metals: Ferrous metals contain Iron (4) Duplex process
(ferrous) as their main constituent.
(5) Cementation process
Main constituents of ferrous materials are Pig
(6) Electric process

[ 86 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

Treatment of steel CO2,moisture, impurities of sulphur, arsenic etc.

(a) Mechanical treatment : Mechanical • CRS TMT bars are produced with an addition
treatment are introduced to give desired shape of corrosion resistance elements such as cop-
to the steel so as to fit the purpose. per, chromium, and phosphorus.
(i) Drawing : It refers to the reduction of cross Commercial forms of steel
section & to increase it length proportionately.
The following are the shape in which steel is
The metal is drawn through dies or specially available in the market.
shaped tools. This is essentially used for making
(i) T sections (ii) Round bars
wires & rods.
(iii) Flat bars (iv) Channel section
(ii) Rolling : This operation is carried out in (v) Plates (vi) Angle setions
specially prepared rolling mills. Angles,
(vii) I section (viii) Expanded metal
channels, joists, rails etc are obtained by rolling.
(ix) Corrugated sheets (sheets) (x)Square bars
(iii) Pressing : The steel metal is pressed between
a die & punch of an equipment known as press. Material Percentage carbon
The main advantage of this process is the Wrought iron (purest < 0.1%
absence of shock (unlike forging) from of Iron)
(iv) Forging : This process refers to the repeated
Steel 0.10–0. 25%
blowing of the steel using a power hammer or
a press. The metal is heated above the critical High carbon steel 0.55–0.95%
temperature before the blows. The process is Cast Iron 2.00–4.00%
implied to increase the density & improve the
Pig iron: The crude impure iron (3-4% carbon)
grain strength of steel.
is known as Pig-iron.
Special points: It forms the basic material for the manufacture of
Annealing : This process refers to making the steel cast-iron, wrought iron & steel. It is used for making
soft so as to increase its workability upon machines. base plattes, column, door brackets etc.Pig iron is
Tensile strength is reduced but ductility is increased. obtained after smelting of calcined ore in a blast
Toughness of steel is also enhanced against sudden furnace.
stresses. Annealing temperature range depends upon Cast iron: Cast iron is manufactured by remelting
the carbon content. As the carbon content increases pig iron with coke & limestone. It is used for making
the required temperature for annealing decrease. ornamental castings, like as lamp post, bathroom
Purification fittings, wall brackets etc.
• Purification of iron is done by magnetic rollers. Wrought iron: It is almost pure & it hardly
• In which magnetic ore (Iron) is attached by contains carbon more than 0.10 percent. It is used
magnetic roller.Therefore, non-magnetic part of ore for making roof covering, rivets, chimney gates etc.
1. The unbroken series of steps between landing
(such as dust, clay, glass etc.) will left & removed
is called.......
easily.
(a) Flight (b) Going
Refining: In metallurgy, refining consists of purify- (c) Head room (d) Baluster
ing an impure metal & in this method, the final ma- 2. The pitch of the stair should not be lesser
terial obtained is generally similar to the original one than....
(process doesn’t involve any chemical reaction of (a) 90o (b) 25o
material), only it is pure. (c) 45 o
(d) 40o
Dressing: In the field of extractive metallurgy, min- 3. The head room over a stair shall be at least.....
(a) 2.1 m (b) 3.1 m
eral processing, it is the process of separating com-
(c) 5.1 m (d) 4.1 m
mercially valuable minerals from their ores.
4. Plastic asphalt is
Calcination: Calcination is the process of heating
(a) Used as a water proofing layer over roof
any material in the limited supply of air or absence
of air. It is used in metallurgy ores & other solid ma- (b) A mixture of cement and asphalt
terials to bring about a thermal decomposition by cal- (c) A natural asphalt
cination. This process is performed to remove (d) a refinery product

[ 87 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

5. How many ingredients is varnish composed of 14. Bitumen in

? (a) Solid state is called asphalt
(a) 5 (b) 4 (b) Semifluid state is called min-eral tar
(c) 2 (d) 3 (c) Fluid state is called petroleum
6. A straight line touching the nosing of the (d) All of the above
various steps and parallel to the slope of the
stair is called the.... 15. In a wooden door,"Style" is the
(a) Line of flight (a) Outside vertical member of the shutter
(b) Line of winder
(b) Topmost horizontal member of the shutter
(c) Line of nosing
(d) Line of landing (c) Middle horizontal member of the shutter
7. Tapering steps provided for changing the (d) Horizontal projection of head
direction of a stair is termed as____.
16. The skylights are usually provided for_____.
(a) Soffit (b) Flier
(a) Inner portions of the building
(c) Scotia (d) Winder
(b) Sloping surface of the
8. Yield stress of ordinary mild steel bars after
pitched roof
twisting to a pitch of about 9 to 13 diameters (c) Outer portions of the building
(a) Increase by about 50% (d) All of above
(b) Decrease by about 30% 17. In which type of flooring, the base concrete of
lime or cement concrete of mix 1 : 5 : 10 is
(c) Increase by about 20% laid over well compacted sub base ?
(d) Decrease by about 10% (a) Terrazo flooring
9. The wall provided for dividing one room from (b) Mud flooring
another is known as____. (c) Linoleum flooring
(a) Load bearing wall (d) Granolithic flooring
(b) Retaining wall 18. Asbestos is
(c) Cavity wall (a) A corrugated sheet used for roofing
(d) Partition wall
(b) An incombustible fire-proof material
10. The type of pointing in which V-shaped
projection outside the wall surface is provided, (c) An organic substance
is called (d) All the above
(a) Recessed pointing (b) Weather pointing
(c) V-pointing (d) Tuck pointing 19. Outer projection of a ‘Tread’ is called
(a) Nosing (b) Treader
11. For bituminous materials, vacuum capillary
(c) Step (d) Ging
viscometers are used for the determination of 20. The beams supporting the stair steps, are
(a) Absolute viscosity generally known as
(a) Headers (b) Trimmers
(b) Industrial viscosity
(c) Stringers (d) Spandrel beam
(c) Both the above 21. The minmum thickness of floor slabs for
(d) None of the above buildings is usually
(a) 2 cm (b) 5 cm
12. Area of openings for buildings of large perme-
(c) 9 cm (d) 25 cm
ability is more than
22. The type of roof suitable in plains where
(a) 10% of wall area
rainfall is meagre and temperature is high
(b) 20% of wall area
(a) Pitched and sloping roof
(c) 30% of wall area
(b) Flat roof
(d) 50% of wall area
(c) Shell roof
13. The construction of a temporary structure
(d) None of the above
required to support an unsafe structure is
23. A floor constructed with the 4 to 6 mm marble
called
chips, is known as
(a) Underpinning (b) Shoring
(a) Mosaic floor (b) Marble floor
(c) Scaffolding (d) Jacking
(c) Terrazzo floor

[ 88 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

ARCH  Timber or wooden lintels are the oldest kinds of

lintels & are generally used in hilly terrain areas.
These lintels are expensive, structurally weak,
Arch is a structure which is constructed to span across liable to decay, & vulnerable to fire.
an opening.  The internal curve of an arch is termed as intrados
Arches are suitable under following conditions-  The depth of arch is the perpendicular distance
between the intrados & extrados
1. When loads are heavy  The function of cleats in a roof truss is to prevent
2. Strong abutments or supports are available the purlins from tilting
 An ogee arch is pointed and usually of four arcs,
3. When span is more the centers of two inside the arch & two out-
4. Special architectural appearance is desired side; this produces a compound curve . It is also
called as keel arch.

Classification of Arches
Arches are classified as follows-
1. Shape
V
2. Number of centers
3. Material and workmanship
. Classification According to Shape: Arches
are categorized into the following types based on its
shape.
(a) Flat Arch: It is a weak arch as compared
to other arches. It works like alintel. Its skew back
forms an angle of 60° with the horizontal. The upper
surface of this lintel is horizontal but the inner
surrface is generally given an elevation of 3 mm per
Arches
30 cm.

3-Hinged arches 2-Hinged arches 60°

(Ds = 0) (Ds = 1)

 An arch is subjected to thrust, shear force &

bending moment.
 A three hinged arch is subjected to normal thrust
& radial shear and bending moment.
 A linear arch is subjected to normal thrust only.
 In general, bending moment in arch is significantly
reduced & axial force act as compressive force
(thrust), so most appropriate answer is shear force Flat Arch
& thrust CIVIL Ki GOLI Team (9255624029)
Special Points: The lintels are perferred to arches
because (b) Horse Shoe Arch: The shape of this arch
(a) Arches requird more headroom to span the is like a horse-shoe. These arches are built according
opening like doors, windows etc. to the artisan's point of view.
(b) Arches are difficult in construction.
(c) Arch requires strong abutments to withstand
arch thrust (becasue arch is subjected mostly
by axial thrust)
[ 116 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

generally used for spans of different dimensions. If

this arch is built above the lintel, then it is called a
relieving arch.
(d) Semi-Circular Arch:

Horse Shoe Arch

(c) Pointed Arch: It is also known as gothic
arch. In this, two curves meet at an apex. The
triangle thus formed can be equilateral or isosceles.
An equilateral triangle is also called a lancet arch.

Key Semi-Circular Arch

Key
It is an improved form of a relieving arch. It's
central line is above the springing line. The shape of
curve of arch is semi-circular. The thrust exerted on
the abutment is completely in the vertical direction
because the skew back is in horizontal direction.
60° 60°
(e) Venetian Arch: This is an another form of
pointed arch. The crown side is deeper as compared
to the elevated side. All of its four centers lies on
the springing lines.

Pointed Arch
(c) Segmental Arch:

OO 12 OO34

Venetian Arch
(f) Florentine Arch: This is almost similar to a
venetian arch. The only difference is that its intrados
Segment Arch is of semi-circular in shape. All of its three centers
It is a simple type of arch used in buildings. The are located on the springing lines.
center of this arch is below the springing line. It is

[ 117 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

(g) Stilted Arch: This is a semi-circular arch equal to the sum of definite horizontal distance and
on the two vertical rises. The center of the arch is the holding distance between both ends of the arch.
a horizontal line that passes through the head of both Classification Based on Number of
the vertical rises. Centers-
(i) One-centered Arch–Segmental, semi-
circular, flat, horse shoe and stilted arches fall under
this category. A completely circular arch is called the
bull eye arch and is used in circular shaped windows.
(ii) Two centered arch
The curve surface of these arches makes from two
center points. Examples of two centered arches
equilateral, pointed lancet and Venetian arches.
A lancet arch is pointed, with radii much larger than
the span.
(iii) Three Centred arch
The curve surface of these arches is made from three
center points. This arch is the more or less semi-
elliptical arch. Ex. -Ogee arch, Drop arch, Semi-
Stilted Arch elliptical arch
(iv) Four-centered Arch: This arch has four
(h) Relieving Arch: centers. Venetian arch is an example of this category.
(v) Five-Centered Arch: In this type of lintel
five centers from a semi-elliptical shape.
TECHNICAL TERMS
1. Intrados: This is the inner curve of an arch.
2. Extrados: It is the outer curve of an arch.
3. Crown: It is the highest part of extrados.
4. Soffit: It is the inner surface of an arch. Some-
times, intrados and soffit are used synonymously.
5. Voussoirs: These are wedge-shaped units of
Wood Stone
masonry, forming an arch.
Lintel Core
6. Spandril: This is a curved-triangular space
formed between the extrados & the horizontal line
through the crown.
Relieving Arch
It is generally built at places where timber lintels 7. Springer: It is the first voussoir at springing level;
are used. The weight of the masonry above the lintel it is immediately adjacent the skewback.
does not fall on the lintel but on this arch. Therefore 8. Springs points: These are the points from which
the thickness of timber lintel is kept very small. Also, the curve of the arch springs.
the decomposed wooden lintel can be easily replaced
9. Haunch: It is the lower half of the arch between
without affecting the stability of the structure.
the crown and skew back.
Abutment of a relieving arch should initiate from
10. Centre or striking point: It is the geometrical
the edges of the lintel so that the slope of the skew
centre point from where the arch forming the
back extends outwards from the upper end of the extrados, arch rings & intrados are described or
arch. In this way, the span of the arch should be struck.

[ 118 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

11. Span: It is the clear horizontal distance between lintels are rarely used because of their high cost and
the supports. low tensile stress. Their uses is often limited to
12. Depth or height: It is the perpendicular distance buildings. The minimum thickness of stone lintel
between the intrados and extrados. should be 10 cm. Thickness of the lintel should be 4
cm per 30 cm of span. Stones are easily available
13. Rise: It is the clear vertical distance between
the highest point on the intrados and the springing in hilly areas but their use in plain area is limited due
line. to their high cost.

14. Impost: It is the projecting course at the upper 2. Timber Lintels: Timber lintels are old
part of a pier or abutment to stress the springing line. fashioned lintels and now-a-days, they are only used
in hilly areas. Timber is easily available in hilly areas.
15. Thickness (or breadth of soffit): This is the
Timber is very expensive in the plain areas and it
horizontal distance, measured perpendicular to the
front and back faces of an arch. cannot be used as a fire-resistant element because
it catches fire quickly. The minimum thickness of a
timber lintel is kept 8 cm. But when it is used for a

LINTEL bigger span, its thickness should be calculated by

suitable designing method. An arch, called relieving
A lintel works as a beam and transfers its load arch, is built above the timber so that the masonry
on the masonry of both sides of the doors and weight does not fall on it.
windows. 3. Brick Lintels: Brick lintels have weak
structure and therefore used in places having less
opening or equal to 90 cm. Brick lintels are made
using first class bricks. Its thickness lies from 10 cm
Lintel to 20 cm depending on its length, Frog is extensively
Window opening
used for making a brick lintel. Filling mortar in the
The overlapping of lintel over the masonry on
frog increases the shear stress of the joints and also
both sides of the doors and walls is very significant.
strengthen the lintel.
For overlapping one end of the lintel–either 10 cm,
or 4 cm per 30 cm of span whichever has the higher 4. Steel Lintels: Steel lintels are used at places
value should be adopted. with high opening and heavier super structure. Iron
girders can be used as lintels if a person does not
Lintels are the beams provided over the openings
want to use a thick lintel. When more than one
in walls for doors & windows.
girder have to be laid then these girders are placed
Lintels are made of different types of materials,
parallel to each other. Holes are drilled at equal
such as – wood, stone, brick and R.C.C.
distance along its length and then joined together
Bearing of lintel should be minimum of following:
through bolts. Girders, joined in such a way, are often
(a) 10 cm (b) Height of lintel (c) (1/10 ) to (1/12)
buried into cement-concrete.
of the span of lintel
5. Reinforced Brick Linte: If brick lintels
Particulars
Shape Curved
Arch Lintels
Horizontal and straight
have to be used for larger spans, then these are laid
Bed Joint Joints are radial except in
monolithic construction
Joints are horizontal
in the form of reinforced bricks. Reinforced rods are
Lateral thrust Exert on vertical support Do not exert
Rise Provided Not provided placed in the joints of adjacent bricks and filled with
Appearance Good architectural Simple appearance
appearance cement-concrete. The thickness of these lintels is
Strength Quite strong vertical uniform Equally strong for uniform &
loading but weak under point loading either 10 cm, or a coefficient of the thickness of the
point loading
brick.
Types of Lintels 6. Reinforced Concrete Lintel: Now-a-days
1. Stone Lintels: Stone lintels are used reinforced concrete are mostly used because of its
especially where stones are available in abundance. long life, high tensile strength and high resistance to
Stone has a weak tensile strength and therefore can fire. These can be built very easily and it is cheaper
not withstand very heavy load. Therefore, stone as compared to other lintels. It can be designed for

[ 119 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

History of Surveying inequalites of land surface. Topographic Survey

is done to determine the Natural features of a
The evidences show that surveying was present Country. Scale range is 1 : 25000 to 1 : 1000000.
eves before 2990 B.C. The construction of the (ii) Hydrographic Survey: It is conducted on or
pyramids of Giza depicts this. near water bodies. Marine survey is also one
Modern surveying techniues show that the of it’s type.
differences between four arms of the pyramid is ± (iii) Engineering Survey: It is used for design &
construction of new routes (roads & railways).
8 cm, in which the length of each arm is 230 cm &
Also used to calculate for route alignment.
the elevation of all the edges should not be more than (iv) Geological Survey: It is conducted to obtain
14 mm. It's arms are categorized in the cardinal data of different strata of earth’s surface for
direction at 3 minutes. According to the records, the the purpose of geological studies.
first boundary survey was performed in Egypt in (v) Cadastral Survey : It is used to produce plans
1400 B.C. In earlier border surveys of Egypt, for the of property boundries for legal purpose. The
revenue chain is used in cadastral surveying.
taxation purpose land areas were marked and
Also called public land survey.
recorded along the Nile river in order to show the (vi) Astronomic Survey: It is conducted for
ownership of that land. determination of azimuths, latitudes, longitudes,
In 120 B.C., a Greek philosopher Heron local time etc. at various places on the earth
published a number of important books, in which the by observing heavenly bodies. Absolute location
of a point on earth surface is obtained by it.
surey of an area, geometric plan drawings & related
Classification based on instrument used -
calculations for various methods has been described. Chain surveying , Compass surveying, Theodolite
Heron invented the primary surveying instrument survey, Levelling survey, Contouring, EDM
called diopter, which could be moved in the vertical survey, Photogrammetric survey, Tacheometric
and horizontal planes. Measurement of horizontal and survey.
vertical angle was possible through this instrument. Special Points:
This type of instrument is not only used in the field  Archaeological survey is done to collect
of surveying but also in astronomical observations. information about old & nelic structures.
 Reconnaissance Survey is a kind of preliminary
 The headquarter of Survey of India is located in
survey which is performed to find out method
dehradun (1767).
of survey to be adopted & its rough cost.
 Both Plan & Map are the graphical representations
 Correct Sequence of Surveys
of the features on horizontal plane. Plan is a large
(a) Traffic Survey
scale representation but map is a small scale
(b) Reconnaissance Survey
representation of any structure.
(c) Preliminary Survey
 The difference in the length of an arc & its
(d) Detailed Survey/Location Survey
subtended chord on earth’s surface for a distance
of 18.5 km is about 10 mm.(but some books also Principles of Surveying
recommended 15.2 mm, which is not right as per (i) Work from Whole to Part: So as to localise
exam point) the error & prevent their accumulation.
 The earth is an oblate spheroid, the length of equa-
(ii) Locate a Point by Atleast two
torial axis being 12,756.602 km & polar axis
Measurements:
12,713.168 km. The polar axis (12713.168 km) is
shorter than the equatorial axis (12756.602 km) Errors and mistakes
by about 43 km (0.34 %).
 The length of an arc of 1.2 km on earth's mean  Errors arise due to physical conditions of the
surface is only 1 mm more than the straight line instrument like temperature at the time of
connecting those two points. measurement & human eye's limitation.
 The average radius of earth is taken 6370 km for all  Mistakes are caused by misunderstanding of the
calculations point of view. problem, poor judgement or carelessness & these
can be corrected only if discovered.
Classifiaction of Surveying Based on
Purpose Error = Measured value  True value
(i) Topographical Survey: It is conducted to Correction = True value  Measured value
obtain data & to make a map indicating
Hence Correction = - Error

[ 156 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

Most Probable Value  The value that has more Cross staff, optical square etc.
chances of being the correct value.
5. Line ranger if easily available
2
V 6. One tape of steel or stringed up (of length 10
ES = ± 0.6745 , ( ES = Probable error of
(n  1) m or 20 m)
single observation) 7. Pegs as per requirement

V 2 E 8. One wooden hammer (Mallet)

Em = 0.6745  S , (E m = Probable
n(n  1) n 9. Field book, copying pencil and knife
error of mean observation) 10. One plumb bob (if needed)
Error in chaining: Errors in chaining are classified 11. Other materials like-chalk, strong rope, nails
as follows:
etc.
1. Compensating errors (Random errors)
2. Cumulative errors (systematic errors) Unit of Angle and Measuring Instrument

Cumulative errors (systematic errors)

A number of angle measuring instruments have
been invented till date, but the instruments which are
 These are proportional to the length of the line &
may be positive or negative. mainly used are as follows-
 These are the errors which are liable to occur in 1. Instruments for the Direct Measurement
the same direction & tend to accumulate. of Directions
Compensating errors (Random errors) (i) Prismatic Compass (ii) Surveyor Compass
 These are proportional to the square root of the 2. Instruments for Measurement of Angles
length of the line.
(i) Sextant (ii) Theodolite
 These are the errors which are liable to occur in
both the directions & tend to compensate. An angle is the difference between the directions
of two mutually intersecting lines. There are three
Ca s e s Errors
prevailing systems for measuring an angle.
In correct length of tape Cumulative + or –
Tape not stretched horizontally Cumulative + • Sexagesimal System
Error due to sag Cumulative +
Tape not stretched tight & Cumulative + 1. Perimeter = 360° (Are degree)
straight, but both ends in line
1 Degee = 60° (Arc Minute)
Error due to temperature Cumulative + or –
Variation in pull Cumulative + or – 1 Minute = 60° (Arc Seconds)
Error in marking tape lengths Compensating + or –
Disturbing arrows after they are set Blunder • Centesimal System
Errors in reading the tape Mistake
1 Perimeter = 400g (Grade)
Incorrect counting of tape length Blunder
Careless holding & marking Compensating + or – 1 Grade = 100c (Centigrade)
1 Centigrade = 100cc (Centi Centigrade)
Units of Measurement
• Hour System
1 ft. = 0.3 m 1 mile = 1.609 km
1 Perimeter = 24h (Time-Hour)
1 yard = 3 ft 1 acre = 43560 sq. ft.
1 hectare = 2.471 acre 1 Nautical mile = 1.852 km 1 Hour = 60 m (Time-Minute)

Field Work Equipment 1 Minute = 60s (Time-Second)

Chain surveying or chain triangulation is done In India, mostly the first system is used.
with that help of following equipment– Routine Care of Surveying Instruments
1. One chain of length 20 m or 30 m Before making the first set up of the day, visually
2. Arrows 10 pieces inspect the instrument for cracks, bumps, & dents.
Check the machined surfaces and the polished faces
3. Drawing rods, staff or interlude rods-minimum
of the lenses and mirrors. Try the clamps and
3 in quantity (generally 12 pieces)
motions for smooth operation (absence of binding or
4. In order to draw right angle, instruments like-

[ 157 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

gritty sound). blueprint that is made during the reconnaissance. If

1. Frequently clean the instrument externally. any other difficulty or facts are available, then the
Any accumulation of dirt and dust can scratch the surveyor should specify about them. The selected
machined or polished surfaces and cause friction or stations are numbered on the ground in such a way
sticking in the motions. that they can be easily located during the main survey
or after the survey. The states of all the survey
2. Non-optical parts may be cleaned with a soft
stations on the ground are to be marked in the
cloth or clean chamois.
following manner-
3. Dirt and dust should be removed only with a
1. If the land is rough, then it is dug a little and
clean soft cloth or with a camel hair brush.
filled with cement and the station is fixed on it.
4. Cover an instrument whenever it is uncased
2. If the land is moist, then a wooden peg is fixed
and not being used for any length of time, particularly
in it & a little part of the peg is kept above the
if there is dust or moisture in the air.
ground, on which the name of the station etc. can
5. Clean the external surfaces of lenses with a be written with ink or color.
fine lens brush and, if necessary, use a dry lens tissue.
3. If the location lies on a fixed surface like-
Do not use silicone treated tissues, as they can
concrete floor, paved roads or street, then iron nail
damage the coated optics. It is permissible to breathe
or spike is dug & the station is numbered. The head
on the lens before wiping it, but liquids, such as oil,
of the nail should be at the bottom surface of the
benzene, water, etc., should never be used for
road and name etc. should be written on it with ink
cleaning purposes. Do not loosen or attempt to clean
or colour.
the internal surfaces of any lens.
4. If the station is to be used for longer duration
6. After an instrument has been used in damp
of time, then a concrete block is prepared on the
or extremely cold situations, special precautions must
earth's surface or a stone is buried & the position
be taken to prevent condensation of moisture inside
of the station is numbered. The name & description
of the instrument. When working with the instrument
of the station is written on this block.
in cold weather, it should be left in the carrying case
in the vehicle overnight. If stored in a heated room Broad Surveying or Chaining and Filling
overnight, the instrument must be removed from the Field Book
carrying case. If the instrument is wet or frost After finishing the primary tasks, the base line
covered, remove it from its case, and leave it at room is measured using a chain. The chain measurement
temperature to dry out. of the base line should be done correctly and
Initial Surveying or Reconaissance carefully because the precision of the entire
surveying process depends on this line.
The main principle of surveying is to work by
dividing the surface from whole to parts. For this In every chain measurement there are three
purpose, the surface to be surveyed is divided into steps-
triangles.This survey done in order to get the detailed 1. Drawing survey line.
information about the area is called initial surveying 2. Distance measurement of this line.
or reconnaissance. During reconnaissance, a rought
3. Measurement of offset of the objects near the
blueprint or state blueprint or reference sketch is
line which gives descriptive surveying and filling the
made in which the all the main images present in the
field book.
area are shown like–houses, roads, rivers, drains,
ponds, trees etc. Before pulling the chain forward on the
surveying line, it should be seen that the measurement
Selecting, Marking and Locating Survey
of all the offsets etc. has been done and is written
Stations
in the field book.
By keeping in mind the previously discussed
1. If the smallest division of a Vernier is longer
things after the selection of an appropriate station, than the smallest division of its primary scale,
the condition of the area should be marked on the

[ 158 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

the Vernier is known as....... survey is done on which basis ?

(a) Direct Vernier (a) Linear (b) Weight
(b) Double Vernier (c) Volume (d) Area
(c) Simple Vernier 10. one ground is
(d) Retograde vernier (a) 2400 sq. metre
2. The surveying used to determine additional (b) 222.96 sq. metre
details such as boundaries of fields, is called (c) 10.764 sq. metre
(a) City surveying (d) 2.41 sq. metre
(b) Location surveying 11. Compensation errors in chaining are _______
(c) Cadastral surveying
(a) Proportional to the length of the line
(d) Topographical surveying
3. The haedquarter of survey of India is located (b) Proportional to the square root of the length
at of the line
(a) New Delhi (b) Mumbai
(c) Inversely prportional to the square root of
(c) Manali (d) Dehardun
the length of the line
4. In case of a direct vernier scale_____
(d) Inversely proportional to the length of the
(a) Graduations increase in opposite direction
line
in which graduations of the main scale
increase 12. The surface of zero elevation around the earth,
which is slightly irregular and curved is known
(b) Smallest division is longer than smallest
is______
division of the main scale
(a) Mean sea level
(c) Graduations increase in the same direction
in which graduations of the main scale (b) Geoid surface
increase (c) Level surface
(d) None of these (d) Horizontal surface
5. Total station's survey notes and observations 13. Survey of India was publishing toposheets using
are recorded....... a scale of
(a) During lunch break
(b) Before the survey work (a) 1 : 1000 (b) 1 : 6000
(c) In electronic note book (c) 1 : 10000 (d) 1 : 5000
(d) In electronic display 14. Which of the following statements in respect
6. A scale respresenting either three units or only
of a map A having scale 1:1000 and another
one unit and its fractions upto second place of
map B having scale 1:5000 is true ?
decimal point is______
(a) Map A is a large scale map as compared
(a) Diagonal scale
to map B
(b) Comparative scale
(b) Map B is a large scale map compared to
(c) Vernier scale map A
(d) Shrunk scale (c) Map B is a more detailed map compared
7. Which one of the following survey equipments to map A
is battery operated ?
(d) None of the above
(a) Total station
(b) Plane table 15. Symmetric errors are those errors
(c) Auto level (a) Whose effects are cumulative and can be
(d) Dumpy level
determined
8. 200 sq. meter is equal to
(a) 2000 sq. yards (b) On circumference of circum-scribing
(b) 2400 sq. yards circle
(c) 240 sq. yards (c) Outside the great triangle
(d) 200 sq. yards
9. The measurement of longitudinal section (d) In the centre of the circums-cribing circle

[ 159 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

Electrical Wiring The methods of producing dynamic electricity are as

Elementary Electricity follows

The branch of physics, in which the electric charges (i) By Magnetic Effect: When a conductor is
are studied, is called Electrostatics. Electricity is a rotated in a static magnetic field, electromotive force
kind of force which can neither be seen nor be or e.m.f is induced in the conductor. In a way, it is
touched but, it can be experienced through incidents the drift force of the electrons. This is called dynamic
and experiments. electricity. It is generated in the form of AC and DC.

Now-a-days, electrical energy is used in motors, (ii) By thermal Effect: It is called the thermocouple
generators, computer technology, hospitals, small or method. In this method, when the junction of two
large scale industries, research work and in every different or unlike metals is heated, dynamic
home appliance. electricity is generated which is obtained at their
terminals. It can not be used at commercial level
Principle of Electricity
because it is generated in very less quantity.
In a conductor, the flow of electrons in one directions
(iii) By Light Effect: Some equipment becomes
is called current. The Greek philosopher, Thales in
active when exposed to sunlight, such as photelectric
600 B.C., observed that when amber is rubbed with
cells. This cell absorbs the sunlight on its plates in
silk, it gains the property of attracting pieces of paper,
the form of positive and negative charges. This
pitch ball etc. Amber is termed as 'elektron' in Greek.
charge can usually be stored in any chargeable
Therefore, this property originating in amber, through
secondary cell. These are also called solar cells.
this method, was called electricity.
(iv) By Chemical Effect: Electricity is produced in
Benjamin Franklin discovered the fluid theory of
cells and batteries by chemical reaction, through the
electricity; according to which, current in source
process of ionization in electrolyte. This can not be
flows from positive terminal to negative terminal.
generated at large scale. It is used in electronic
Basically, electricity is of two types. equipments, automobile and for other special
Static Electricity purposes.
This electricity can not flow from one place to Important Terminologies Related to Electricity
another. It is in the form of charge. It can not be 1. Electric Current
generated in large scale. Copper Bar
Principle of Static Electricity
When the glass rod is rubbed on the silk cloth, free
electrons are displaced from the glass rod to the silk
cloth. Electrons are negatively charged. Due to lack Free Electrons
of electrons on the glass rod, it acquires positive
charge & the silk cloth acquires negative charge. So,
an imbalance of electrons is generated. When equal
amount of positive and negative charges are brought
Current Flow
in contact, they cancel out each other and so the
object becomes neutral. Therefore, static electricity
Direction of Electron and Current Flow
can not be used at commercial level.
In any circuit, the rate of flow of electrons in one
Dynamic Electricity direction is called electric current. A copper rod
Dynamic electricity is called electric current. Unlike contains a large number of free electrons. When
static electricity, it can be easily treansmitted from electric voltage is applied on the copper rod, the free
one place to another. This can also be defined as the electrons starts flowing from negative terminal
electromotive force induced by the rotation of towards the positive terminal.
conductors. It can be transmitted from one place to In other words, current can be defined as follows:
another through cables, wires etc.
(a) In any closed circuit, rate of flow of electrons is

[ 189 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

called current. 1
V   1 volt.
No. of electrons I
Current, I =
time Volt:
(ii) The charge flowing in a circuit in 1 second is It is the potential difference of electromotive force
called current. and is the unit of voltage.It is denoted by 'V'. The
electromotive force required to pass I ampere
Charge (q)
Current, I = current through I ohm resistance is called one volt.
Time (t)
1 Volt = 1 ampere × 1 ohm
(iii) If in any cross section, Dq charge flow in Dt time, Potential Difference
then
The difference between potential or voltage of any
q q dq two points in a closed circuit is called potential
i avg  and instantaneous current i lim 
t t  t dt difference. It's unit is volt, and is also termed as P.D.
Electric current is a scalar quantity. S.I unit of electric It is denoted by 'V'.
current is coulomb/second or ampere. Resistance
The property of a conductor which resist the current
I coulomb
I ampere= flowing through that conductor is called its resistance.
I second
It is denoted by R. The unit of resistance is ohm and
Coulomb it is written as ohm (W).
This is the unit of charge. When I ampere current Ohm
flows through a conductor or a circuit in 1 second, When a current of I ampere flows under the
then I coulomb charge is said to pass through the influence of 1 volt in a circuit, the resistance of that
circuit. Charge is denoted by 'q' and Coulomb is circuit will be 1 ohm.
wirtten as 'C'.
1 volt
1 coulomb = 1 ampere × 1 second 1 ohm 
1 ampere
Or 1 coulomb = 6.242 × 1018 eelectron
Electric Potential It is the unit of resistance and it is measured in ohm
(W)
The force that propels electrons to flow in a circuit
is called electric potential. It's unit is volt. It is Load Resistance (RL)
denoted by 'V' Potential is divided into the following The total effective resistance of any electric circuit
categories- is called the load resistance of that circuit. The
(i) Low voltage – From 0 Volt to 250 Volts. instruments/appliances connected with the circuit are
called load.
(ii) Medium voltage – From 250 Volts to 650 VOlts
Voltage Drop
(iii) High voltage – From 650 Volts to 11,000 Volts.
The loss of voltage from the various components
(iv) Extra high voltage – More than 11,000 Volts.
connected in an electric circuit due to resistance/
Electric potential can also be defined as- impedance is called voltage drop. According to this,
Work done W it is the product of current and resistance/impedance.
Electric potential or Voltage, V =  For example when electricity is supplied through
Ch arg e Q
wires and cables, voltage drop also arises due to their
Work done is measured in joule and charge is own resistance/impedance. The voltage drop should
measured in columb. Hence, the unit of voltage will be low to maintain the high quality of the electrical
be joule/coulomb or volt. system.
If W = 1 joule and Q = 1 coulomb, then the voltage, Terminal Voltage (VT)
The voltage, measured at the terminals of a generator

[ 190 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

or any electricity generating device with voltmeter Wiring systems are of two types-
is called terminal voltage. It's value is always less 1. Distribution system, 2. Tree system
than e.m.f.
While selection of wiring system, number of circuits,
VT = E – IR number of phases, voltage, atmospheric conditions,
Where, area of building & shape must be considered.
I = Current supplied 1 Distribution System
R = Internal resistance It is more prevalent. An M.C.B is connected in circuit
Electrical Fitting for every branch just after a neutral link, earth
terminal & fuse cut out. A branch of circuit can be
Following steps of electrical fitting make wiring
switched off/on at different times using M.C.B.
easier
Many a times, it happens that the supply of two
1. To Prepare Wiring Diagram rooms is off & the supply of the other rooms is on.
A diagram of the room is drawn on paper, where the This is the advantage of the distribution system.
wiring is to be done. In it, the position of switch, Advantages
holder, ceiling rose & socket are represented through
1. M.C.Bs or fuse are fitted together on board.
symbols. The path of wiring is also marked clearly
Thus, it is easier to change them.
while drawing the diagram to ensure that wiring looks
tidy. 2. The magnitude of voltage is same at each point
in the wiring, which can be switched on or off using
2. Marking
the main switch.
The path through which wiring is to be done is
3. It provides the facility of increasing or decreasing
marked clearly. Horizontal and vertical lines are
the load in domestic electric wiring.
drawn on the wall to get straight wiring.
4. In this system, locating faults is easier. If there is
3. To Fix the Wooden or Rawl Plugs
any fault in circuit, either the fuse will blow off or
To fix the wiring on the wall, holes are drilled in wall the M.C.B. will trip. In this way, the faulty circuit
& wooden or rawl plugs are fixed in them. These will get identified.
are fixed at an equal distance of 30-40 cm. It is fitted
5. The whole circuit is highly insulated.
in the wall in such a way that the broader surface is
inside the wall & the narrow surface is in level with 6. In this system, wiring looks attractive.
the wall surface. Disadvantage
In large buildings, rawl plugs are used instead of The only disadvantage of this system is, it uses more
wooden plugs. Rawl plug is made up of jute and glue. wire that makes the system expensive.
It is screwed in the wall. 2 Tree System
Now-a-days, instead of rawl plug, fill plug is used, In it, supply is given to each branch, from main line
which is made up of plastic asbestos. It is like string. through taping. After main switch, phase & neutral
Fill plug is soaked in water & screwed immediately are connected to the main supply and then supply is
after making the holes with the help of rawl tool. given to the other circuits and taping is done
Wiring System thereafter. At present, this system is not in use. This
According to the Indian Electricity Rules (1956) 31 system is commonly used in ships.
& 32, connecting fuse cut-out on phase wire and Disadvantages
positive wire and neutral link on neutral wire is 1. The magnitude of voltage is not same at each
mandatory. Phase wire is sealed after connecting the point.
energy meter with the service line. The sequence of
2. In this system, locating fault is difficult.
connection should be like, energy meter, fuse cut out,
main switch, distribution board etc. The customers 3. In this system, wiring does not look attractive.
install their main switch after sealing the energy 4. The number of joints is more and hence, the wiring
meter. becomes weak.

[ 191 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

BUILDING PLANNING
The bye-laws are to be strictly followed. But there is
a set of principles which are guidelines for good
planning. These guidelines are presented for planning
residential buildings under the following subheadings: Desirable b × d
Undesirable b × d
1. Aspects, 2. Prospects (wastage in
3. Roominess, 4.Furniture requirements circulation area)
5. Groupings, 6. Circulation
7. Privacy, 8. Elegance
9. Sanitation, 10. Flexibility
11. Economy, 12. Practical consideration.
ASPECT Undesirable b × d
Aspect means arrangement of doors, windows & (Tunnel Effect)
ventilators in the external walls to make good use of
sun, breeze, scenic view, etc. Dining room should
have southern aspect means dining room should be Proportioning of Rooms
located on southern side of the building. The following FURNITURE REQUIREMENTS
aspects are desirable in India: Furniture requirements play an important role in
• Dining room: Southern aspect to enjoy winter planning. In designing a drawing room, positions of
sun. sofa, chairs, T.V. etc., should be drawn to scale and
• Reading rooms, stairs: Northern aspect to enjoy checked for circulation area. For bedrooms the
diffused light. position of cots, dressing tables, cupboards should be
• Drawing and living room: Southern or south- drawn and available area checked for circulation. To
eastern aspect to enjoy winter sun. justify the size of a room in the building furniture
• Kitchen: Eastern aspect to make use of morning arrangement must be shown.
sun. GROUPING
• Bedroom: Western or south-western aspect to Grouping means disposition of various rooms for the
enjoy breeze in summer. convenience of users. In residential buildings,
PROSEPECTS grouping is aimed at achieving comfort, privacy &
Prospect is about locating & selecting type of doors efficiency, while in other buildings it is aimed at
and windows in outer walls so as to provide achieving economical service.
aesthetically good view. Quality of doors, windows, In a residential building:
projections of sunshades and grills to windows need • Sanitary block should be away from dining room
planning for the prospects. Instead of ordinary and kitchen but at convenient place from the
windows, if bay windows are provided it adds to bedrooms.
prospect of the building. A building with rectangular • Bedrooms should have easy access to the
plan may not be attractive. drawing and dining rooms.
ROOMINESS • Bathrooms and water closet should be nearer
It refers to suitable proportioning of length, width & to each other to reduce plumbing cost.
height of rooms. Length to width ratio should be 1.2 • Dining room should be close to kitchen to improve
to 1.5. If it is nearly square plot of area is wasted for convenience. It also keeps dining hall and
circulation and if it is more than 1.5, it gives the tunnel bedrooms away from odour and smoke.
effect. Doors should be properly located so that utility • Kitchen should be nearer to the backyard so that
& privacy is maximum.Light colour creates effect occationally dinner functions can be held in the
of more space and therefore, use light coloured walls backyard.
and floor.Cup boards and lofts provide increased utility. • Verandah should be adjacent to drawing room
so as to accommodate visitors if they are more
in number and to receive strangers.
• There should be easy access to staircase.

[ 197 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

In offices, the administrative department is

located centrally. In factories various sections are to
Verandah
be so located that the produce moves in one direction D
and finished product comes out at marketing section.
CIRCULATION
Circulation refers to the space provided for Kitchen
Dining-cum-Drawing
movement. Circulation in a building is of two types:
1. Horizontal circulation, 2. Vertical circulation.
Horizontal circulation
D
Passages, lobbies and halls serve as horizontal
circulation area. Within a room also a portion serves
as utility & rest for circulation. For example, in a Verandah
hall, area occupied by furniture serves as utility and
space around furniture is to be provided for
movement. The following points should be considered
Verandah Improves
while planning the circulation area: External Privacy
Internal Privacy: It is achieved by suitably grouping
• It should be just sufficient.
and properly locating doors and door shutters. Central
• It should be straight.
door provides less privacy compared to doors provided
• Common sanitary block should have easy access
at corner. Arrangement of door shutter opening also
to every user through passage or lobby.
plays an important role in extending privacy to a room.
• It should be well lighted and ventilated.
Vertical circulation
Circulation between different floors is termed vertical Exposed
circulation. It is provided using stairs, escalators, lifts Area
& ramps. Area of
Privacy
Stairs are common in duplexes and in two-to
three-storey building. Escalators are preferred in
shopping malls where number of users are large &
frequent. Escalators are slow but can serve large
number of users. Lifts are mandatory in more than D
three-story residential and public building. However,
exemption is given to four-storey hostel buildings
where users are mainly youngsters. Exposed
Ramps are to be provided in hospitals and in the public Area
places where handicapped people are users.
PRIVACY
Planning should take care of privacy of one room Area Area
from the other rooms in a building as well as parts of of of
Privacy Privacy
the building from neighbouring building & from the
street. The former one may be termed internal privacy
while the latter one as external privacy. D
External Privacy:
It can be enhanced by:
• Building compound wall to a height of 1.35 m to
1.5 m. Position of Doors
• Suitably locating main entrance to the building. and Area of Privacy
• Planting trees and creepers.
• Providing verandah facing main street. ELEGANCE
• Providing ground glass windows. It refers to the general effect felt by viewer from
• Providing louvred windows to bathrooms and outside. The following points should be noted to get
toilets. elegant view of the building:
• Superior materials should be used on the building
face towards the street.
• A building located on an elevated spot gives
impressive appearance.

[ 198 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

• Sunshades, type of door and windows should be building.

superior and attractive. • To remove accumulation of carbon dioxide
• Superior and attractive colour should be given exhaled by occupants.
to the building face towards the street. • To remove smoke generated in the building.
• Balconies towards the street add to the elegance • To prevent suffocation.
of the building. In rooms occupied by few persons, the required
• The width, length and height of buildings air change is automatically attained due to leakage
contribute in making a building elegant. It may be around windows in winter & by keeping windows
noted that the Taj Mahal is famous for elegance due open in warm weather. In case of factories, assembly
to superior finish and elegancy due to suitable halls, auditoriums etc., where there is overcrowding,
proportion. atleast 14-16 m3 of space should be provided for every
SANITATION person and for this purpose, no space more than 4.25
It includes providing good lighting, ventilation & m above the floor level should be taken into
sanitary convenience to keep the inmates cheerful consideration.
and free from disease. The standards recommended for air change are -
Lighting: It may be natural light or artificial light. Air Changes Required
However, natural light is preferred over artificial light
as it kills pathogenic bacteria, stimulates blood & is Air changes
Space to be ventilated
per hour
cost effective. Light should be uniformly distributed
in the building. There should not be glaring light. The Assembly halls/auditoriums 3–6
factors contributing to natural light are: Bedrooms/living rooms 3–6
• Location of windows and ventilators on southern Bathrooms, toilets 6 – 12
face (in northern hemisphere) and eastern face Classrooms 3–6
give ample sunlight while windows on northern Cinema halls 6–9
face give diffused light. Cafes, restaurants 12 – 15
• Provision of windows and ventilators of suitable Kitchens (domestic) 3–6
size at appropriate positions. In residential Kitchens (common) 6–9
buildings, the ratio of window area to floor area Laboratories 3–6
Offices 3–6
should not be less than 1:10 while in schools it is
Factories (medium metal works) 3–6
not less than 1:5.
Garages 12 – 15
• Reflection factor of walls, ceiling & flooring may
be increased by going for white colour. It may Types of ventilation
be noted that white colour offer 100% reflection Ventilation may be divided into natural & mechanical
and black colour zero % reflection ventilation.
• Stairs should be well illuminated to avoid Mechanical ventilation may be termed artificial
accidentally missing steps. ventilation also.
• Drawing-room and kitchen should be very well (a) Natural Ventilation: In this system, required
illuminated while relatively less amount of light is ventilation in a building is achieved by proper
enough in dining and bedrooms. location and size of doors, windows, ventilators
• Study tables and dressing table need light and skylight. The following points are to be
focusing arrangements. It may be provided with considered in designing a building for natural
electric light ventilation:
• Whenever sufficient natural lighting is not • For good ventilation, window sill level should be
enough, artificial light should be made available by between 750 mm and 900 mm.
using fluorescent light. • In localities where the wind is quite constant,
Ventilation: It is the entry of fresh air & removal of the number of openings should be approximately
vitiated air from a room by natural or mechanical equal on all sides and they should be located at
means. An air change is said to have taken place the same level.
when the volume of air replaced is equal to the volume • Window area should be a minimum of 10% of
of the room. Good ventilation is necessary for the floor area while in bed and drawing room a
following reasons: minimum of 15 to 20% is preferred. A value more
• To remove body odour generated. than 25% will not increase ventilation
• To supply fresh air to the occupants. • In buildings where internal air is likely to be more
• To remove dust and bacteria-carrying particles. than external temperature, cooler air from
• To remove condensation of moisture in the outside enters building through openings at lower

[ 199 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

Circle has 5 Grip points

Rectangle has 8 Grip point

• We need 2 points to define Rectangle com-

mand.
• 1 Auto Cad objects in a Rectangle.
• Using Polygon Command in Auto Cad, we can
drawn minimum 3 and maximum 1024 sides
of polygon.
• Minimum Allowable layers in a drawing - 1
• Objects are rotate around the base point.
• One quick way to view the entire drawing
area is use the zoom command by Type Z
enter A enter
• Grid spacing in X & Y direction is 10.
• Ortho mode allows the user to draw 90o
straight lines.
• Input Devices in Cad can be divided into 3
parts.
• Newman & Sproull formulated 6 ground rules
to be considered in designing graphics soft-
ware.
• Cad & Cam are tied by a common data base.
• To obtain parallel lines, concentric circles and
parallel curves off set is used.
1. What does WCS stand for?
(1) Western CAD system
(2) Worldwide coordinate sectors
(3) World coordinate system
(4) World CAD setting
[WRD-2016 Diploma (Non-TSP)]
Important Points in Auto Cad-
Sol. (c) WCS stands for world co-ordinate system.
• Origin of Drawing is at (0, 0)
2. What keyboard key used for ortho on/off?
• Modern CAD system are based on ICG
(1) F3 (2) F8
(Interactive Computer Graphics)
(3) F6 (4) F7
• UCS - User Co-ordinate system
[WRD-2016 Degree (TSP)]
WCS - World Co-ordinate system
Sol. (b) F3- Object snap, F8- Ortho, F6- Dynamic
LTS - Line Type Scale Command
UCS, F7- Grid
CAM - Computer Aided Manufacturing
3. What does CAD stand for?
(1) Computer Aided Design
• Grip point
(2) Computer Aided Drafting
(3) Computer Aided Drawing
(4) Computer Applied drafting
[WRD-2016 Degree (TSP)]

[ 213 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

Sol. (a) AutoCAD is a commercial computer-aided Sol. (c) There are architectural, scientific, decimal,
design (CAD) and drafting software application. engineering, fractional type of drawing units in Auto-
Developed and marketed by Autodesk, AutoCAD CAD except millimeter.
was first released in December 1982 as a desktop 12. Objects are rotated around the
app (1) Bottom of the object
4. How many points do you need to define the (2) Base point
rectangular command? (3) Centre of the object
(1) 2 (2) 3 (4) Origin
(3) 4 (4) 4 [WRD-2016 Diploma (Non-TSP)]
[WRD-2016 Degree (TSP)] Sol. (b)
Sol. (a) Atleast two points required to draw 13. Which command allows you to change the
rectangular geometry. line type scale?
5. When drawing in 2D, what axis do you not (1) LT (2) LTS
work with? (3) LS (4) LTSC
(1) X (2) Y [WRD-2016 Diploma (Non-TSP)]
(3) Z (4) WCS Sol. (b) The linetype scale LTSCALE (or LTS) is a
[WRD-2016 Diploma (Non-TSP)] shortcut to allow change in AutoCAD.
Sol. (c) When drawing in 2D, we do not work with Z 14. All of the following objects can be extruded
axis. except a/an
6. In Auto-CAD, all subjects are drawn on the (1) Arc (2) Polyline
(1) YZ plane (2) XZ plane (3) Ellipse (4) Region
(3) XY plane (4) ZX plane [WRD-2016 Diploma (TSP)]
[WRD-2016 Diploma (TSP)] Sol. (a) Arcs can not be extruded in Auto-CAD.
Sol. (c) In Auto-CAD, all objects are drawn on the 15. Which command is used to determine the
XY plane. area?
7. How many snap points does an object have? (1) AR (2) AA
(1) 1 (2) 4 (3) A (4) ARE
(3) 5 (4) Depend upon object [WRD-2016 Diploma (TSP)]
[WRD-2016 Diploma (Non-TSP)] Sol. (b) In Auto-CAD you can find the area of
Sol. (d) It's depend upon the geometry. closed geometries in many ways, the most obvious
8. Which file type is as an Auto-CAD backup one is using AA command.
file? 16. What is the minimum allowable number of
(1) BAC (2) BAK layers in a drawing?
(3) DXF (4) DWG (1) 0 (2) 5
[WRD-2016 Degree (TSP)] (3) 1 (4) 2
Sol. (b) .bak file, as the name suggests, is a backup [WRD-2016 Diploma (Non-TSP)]
file for .dwg file in AutoCAD. Sol. (c) There is one allowable number of layers in
9. The origin of a drawing is at drawing.
(1) (0, 0) (2) (1,0) 17. Which command allows you to make the
(3) (0, 1) (4) (1, 1) rectangle or square?
[WRD-2016 Diploma (Non-TSP)] (1) RE (2) REC
Sol. (a) The origin of drawing is at (0, 0). (3) R (4) RS
10. When the F9 key of the keyboard is [WRD-2016 Degree (TSP)]
pressed, which of the following facility is Sol. (b) REC command used is to make rectangle
togged on/off? or square.
(1) Snap (2) Ortho 18. The fillet command creates
(3) O-Snap (4) Grid (1) Sharp corners
[WRD-2016 Diploma (Non-TSP)] (2) Round corners
Sol. (a) F9-Snap, F8- Ortho, F4- Osnap, F7- Grid (3) Round and sharp corners
11. One of the below options is wrong about (4) None of above
type of Auto-CAD drawing units; which one [WRD-2016 Diploma (Non-TSP)]
is it? Sol. (c) The Fillet tool adds a highly specific fillet
(1) Architectural (2) Engineering (arc) between two objects in the drawing
(3) Millimeter (4) Decimal
[WRD-2016 Diploma (TSP)]

[ 214 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

House Drainage of Building

House Drainage System it, a strong smelling gas is mixed with air. This gas
along with air leaks from the point of leakage & is
An effective drainage plan for houses should be
detected by smelling.
prepared for a good drainage system.
Aims of House Drainage
The site plan is drawn as per an appropriate scale
to illustrate the positions of bathroom , urinal, lavatory The main aims of house drainage are as follows-
washbasin & other units, wrt. the position of gully 1. To prevent entry of foul smelling gass from
trap and floor trap. Vertical section of the drain is sewers or septic tanks.
drawn to illustrate distances, invert level, shape of 2. To remove the polluted water as soon as possible.
testing chambers, level & manhole, slope of pipe and
3. To give a provision for quick discharge of excreta.
position of public sewer. In multi-storied buildings, the
lavatory blocks are designed one above another in 4. To maintain a healthy environment in a building.
such a way that the polluted water produced on each 5. To systematically collect and remove waste
floor can be taken from a single pipe to the sewer material.
line. Main Principles of House Drainage
Testing of House Drainage Pipes The following principles should be adopted for
Testing of all the soil pipes, sewer drainage pipes, effective drainage methods-
conveyance pipes etc., is done by the following 1. Drains should have an appropriate slope.
methods-
2. The lavatory blocks should be set in such a way
1. Air Testing: For testing vertical & underground that the length of the drain is minimum. In multi-stored
pipes, the ends of any section of the pipe is closed buildings, these should be set one above the another.
by plugs. Now, high pressured air is blown in the pipe Atleast one wall of the lavatory block should be the
through a pump. Leakage in any joint of a pipeline outer wall of the building in order to fit the vent pipe.
is detected by applying it with soap water & foam
3. All the drains should be continuously straight
start forming at the leakage joint.
between the testing chamber.
2. Colored Water Testing: When colored water
4. The drain should have an appropriate shape.
is passed through one end of the pipe, this water
seeps out from loose joints or broken or cracked 5. All the connections should be waterproof.
places. Once detected, these points are repaired or 6. Drainage pipes should be laid next to the building
the pipe is changed. and not below the building.
3. Smoke Testing: It is similar to air testing but 7. The drainage method should be fitted with
here smoke is blown in the pipe instead of air. The appropriate trap at suitable position.
smoke oozes out of any point of leakage, which is 8. Rain water should be directly sent to the street
clearly visible. gutter through rainwater pipes.
4. Hydraulic Testing: It is mainly used for testing 9. All the drainage systems should be sufficiently
underground pipes. Bottom end of the drainage pipe ventilated.
is plugged and water is filled till 60 - 90 cm height
10. Building drain should not be in contact with the
from the top end. Water seeps out from the point
public sewer through the resistant trap.It will not
leakage in a joint. allow smell to enter the houses.
5. Smell Testing: It is also similar to air testing. In
11. All the drainage system fittings should be strong

[ 246 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

and rustproof. trap is made form cast iron or UPV sheet. It is

provided at the end of water closet. The slope
Appurtenances in Plumbing System of outlets of P - Trap below the horizontal is
kept 14o.
 The height of sink of wash basin above floor
Water meter
Pavement
Chamber level is commonly 75 80cm..
Road
Water supply
to premises
 Intercepting trap is provided at the junction of
house sewer and a municipal sewer so as to pre-
Ferrule Premises boundary
Service pipe vent the entry of foul gases of the municipal sewer
Goose neck Stop cock into the house.
Water main
Service Connection Tight fitting plug Inspection arm or
Trench
or lid called rodding arm
cleaning eye
1. Ferrules: Made up of gun metal, size of dia. Inlet from
Outlet to
house
(10-50) mm street sewer
2. Goose Neck: length 75 cm, generally made up Water seal
of lead.
3. Service Pipe: Made up of GI pipe having dia. Fig. An intercepting trap
(12-50) mm
4. Stop Cock P-trap
5. Water Meter Crown

Special Point: Civil Ki Goli–You can remember Q-trap

Water
above data in alphabetical order. seal
 There are two types of meters
Dip
S-trap

Positive or Displacement Meters: They work

Gully trap: These traps are constructed outside the
by the flow of water causing a piston to reciprocate
within a cylinder building to carry waste water discharge from
Velocity or Inferential Meters: They measure sink, washbasin & bathroom etc. & are con-
the horizontal velocity & large flow. nected to the nearest building drain/sewer to
Trap - It is used to prevent entry of foul gases into prevent the foul gases from sewer do not come
the house. It’s efficiency depend upon depth of water to the house.
seal. In it, General depth of water seal is (25 – 75)
Nahani / Floor trap:This trap is provided in the floor
mm.
to collect waste water from shower, sink, washbasin
Trap Classification
& bathroom etc.The minimum depth of water seal
should be 50 mm. These are available in UPVC or
Shape Bases Purpose Bases cast iron material & have removable grating (JALI)
on the top of the trap.
P Q S Anti Siphonage pipe: A pipe which is installed
Intercepting Gully Floor for the purpose of preserving the water seal of traps
 There are 3 kinds of traps – P, Q and S trap. in drainage system is called anti siphonage pipe.
Depth of a trap seal would depend upon the us-  It is very helpful to seal the back flow of drain-
age of a pipe. The trap seal varies from 2.5 cm to age.
7.5 cm deep.  Anti-siphon pipe is connected to top of P-trap
S trap: This trap is similar to P trap & is used for water closet (W.C.)
fixing water closets in toilets. The only differ-  Waste water pipe: A pipe which carries only
ence between S trap & P trap is that S trap is liquid wastes ( known as sullage ) from kitchens,
used for outlet through the floor while P trap is wash basins etc. is called waste pipe. It does not
used for outlet through the wall. carry human excreta.
P trap: This trap is used with Indian water closet  Vent pipe: A pipe which is provided for the
(ORISSA Pattern).This trap has water seal & ventilation purpose to facilitate the exit of foul
prevents entry of foul gases to the house. This gases into atmosphere.

[ 247 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

 Soil pipe: A pipe which carries human excreta sewage is called sewerage.
from water closet to septic tank is called soil pipe.
3. Disposal: It includes both treatment and disposal
It is not connected to any other pipe except vent
pipe. of sewage. Polluted water is treated & the dirt is
 The sludge does not consist of wastewater from collected and disposed.
toilets. 4. Ventilation: Venting pipes are used to remove
Sanitation System the dirt from sewers.
Cleanliness is an important factor in our daily lives. 4. Sanitary Fittings.
A lot of waste material is produced in buildings & The following fittings are used for removing polluted
other places during daily activities. These materials water from buildings-
are in solid, semi-solid, liquid or gaseous state.
Water Closet
Improper disposal of the waste material can pollute
the environment & consequently create an unhealthy A water closet has a pan and a trap. The trap has a
effect which increases a risk of spreading of 50 - 80 mm deep water seal. These are made of
dangerous disease, epidemics etc. So, after necessary glazed stoneware viterous china, and mosaic. These
treatment of all the waste material, it should be closets are of two types.
disposed in an area situated far from the population. 1. Indian or Squatting Type: They are of three
Keeping in mind the prime importance of cleanliness, types-
CPHED and PHED have been established in India. (a) Orissa Type Pan: Foot rests are made along
These organizations are involved in suitable sewage with the pan in an Orissa type pan. These too have
and treatment of garbage collected from cities and a box type hollow rim. The slope of its bottom is at
towns in a planned manner. 15°
Current Status of Sanitation System (b) Long Type Pan: These are available in 580, 630
In the present scenario, the problem of open and 680 mm of length. A box type hollow rim is fitted
defeciation in rural areas has reduced but it has not all around the upper end of these pans. Water passes
been completely eradicated. The individual household through this rim and falls in the water.
latrine coverage has nearly tripled from just 21.9% (c) Village Type Pan: Village areas do not have
at national level as reported by the Census in 2001 enough water to flush excreta. Thus the bottom of
to around 68% in 2010. this pan is given a more slope. It does not have a
About 58% urban households have a individual hollow rim.
latrines, 24% households use shared, and 6.5% use European or Pedestal Type Closet: It is also
community/public latrines. In order to promote urban called commode type water closet. It is of two types-
and rural sanitation, Government of India has
(a) Syphon Type Pan: The water seal often breaks
instituted the "Nirmal Shahar Puraskar" and
during cleaning. To prevent this, a avent pipe is fitted
"Nirmal Gram Puraskar" that recognizes
in one or two traps. Syphon pipe is connected to the
anntiation initiatives of cities and villages.
washing pipe as shown.
Various Steps of Sanitation Systems
(b) Wash Down Type Pan: It is fitted with a box
The following functions fall under sanitation system- type flushing rim all around its top end. It has a
1. Collection of Garbage: The first step in vertical back wall & is fitted with both P or S trap
sanitation system begins with collection of sewage, and pan For cleaning purpose, it is fitted with a
other polluted water & garbage. It involves plumbing downward flushing tank which is connected to the
lavatory blocks etc. It also includes discharge of back part of the rim.
water from houses. Flushing Cistern
2. Conveyance: Drainage sewer is laid to transport These cisterns are fitted for cleaning toilets and
the collected liquid & solid sewage outside the towns urinals with capacity of 5 - 15 liter. A cistern of 10 -
or till the treatment plant. It also includes discharge 15 liter capacity is used for toilets whereas a 5 liter
of rain water. This mechanism of transporting capacity cistern is used for urinals. Flushing cisterns

[ 248 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

vehicles with easy gradients & curves.

3. Short: The distance between the initial & final
point need to be short, so as to reduce the
construction cost.
4. Economical: The alignment should be economical
during construction, operation & maintenance.
However, if the construction turned out to be
economical, the gradient may not be easy which in
turns increases the cost of operation and
maintenance. Similarly, if the vehicle operation is
taken under consideration and is made economical,
(e) Hexagonal pattern (f) the construction cost becomes higher as the gradient
Minimum travel pattern and curves need to be easy.
5. Comfort: The alignment should be fixed such that
Special Points: it provides comfort to the drivers and the passengers.
Chandigarh  Rectangular and block pattern
Factors Controlling Highway Alignment
Nagpur road plan formulated star and grid pattern.
New Delhi  Radial & circular pattern at connaught 1. Government Alignment: As the road project
place. needs a large investment, the government should be
clear about the requirement of the road (when, what,
how and why to construct).
Overall width between control lines
2. Obligatory Points: Obligatory points determine
Overall width between building lines the highway alignment. They are further divided into
Setback Road land width (right of way) Setback positive obligatory points & negative obligatory points.
distance Roadway or formation distance
(i) Positive Obligatory Points: These are those
Carriageway points through which the alignment should pass.
(a) Positive Obligatery Points: These alignment
Central line of road

should be fixed in such a way that the newly

Road land boundary
Road land boundary

Building line

Control line
Building line
Control line

.m
tngeila constructed road should link to the existing road. It
reduces the cost of construction.
(b) Intermediate Town:
C

Requirements of Highway Alignment

The ideal alignment must have the following
requirements:
1. Safe (S), 2. Easy (E), 3. Short (S) B
A
4. Economical (E), 5. Comfort (C) Intermediate Town
If there is the possibility of a straight road between
The requirements can be memorized as SESEC.
point A and B and there lies the intermediate town
1. Safe: The alignment need to be safe during at C, then the road need to link the intermediate town
construction, operation & maintenance especially at reducing the change in highway alignment.
slopes, embankments and cutting.
(c) Bridge Site/Existing Bridge: The road linking
2. Easy: The construction materials if present at the with the bridge must not be curved and to include
place of construction makes the construction easier. the bridge in the road portion, the highway alignment
Similarly it should be easy during the operation of may be changed.

[ 270 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

(e) Conservation areas and restricted zones.

B (f) The road should not be within the boundary of
C the country.
3. Economy: The construction, operation, and
maintenance work should be economical. So,
highway alignment is selected keeping these things
in mind.
4. Traffic (Type, Amount and Flow Pattern): The
alignment should be according to the traffic amount
A
Proper Location of Bridge and flow pattern. The number of lanes can be
determined as-
(d) Mountain: When the road has to cross a row
of hills, mountain pass may be the suitable alternative. A number of lanes = Traffic Volume/Traffic
Capacity.
5. Geometric Design: Various factors regarding
geometric design as the radius of curve, sight
distance, gradient determines the highway alignment.
6. Geological Condition: Geologically stable hill
slope must be considered while selecting the highway
alignment.
7. Availability of Construction Materials and
Labor: The construction works become easier and
economical when the construction materials are near
the place of highway alignment.
8. Other Considerations: Some other factors are
also considered while controlling the highway
Alignment along a Hillside Pass alignment. These are as follows-
(ii) Negative Obligatory Points: These are those
points through which the alignment should not pass. (a) Drainage: The alignment needs to be fixed such
that the number of cross drainage structures are less.
(a) Religious places are linked up with the human
sentiment.So, thesecan not be destroyed for fixing (b) Monotony: Setting the straight alignment leads
the road alignment. to monotonous driving. So a small bend is provided
to make the driver aware and alert.
(b) Valleys ponds & marshy land need to be avoided.
(c) Political Pressure: The pressure from the
(c) Costly structures present in the way of alignment
government to run the highway alignment in the way,
should be considered and the road alignment should
they decide also affects the selection of highway
be fixed such that it won't destroy those costly
alignment.
structures as the value of compensation for such
structures will be more. Special Consideration in Hill Roads
1. Drainage: Adequate drainage facility needs to be
provided across the road and the number of cross
B drainage structures need to be less during
construction.
A 2. Stability: The road should be aligned with the hill
side that is stable. Excessive cutting and filling may
effect on their stability.

Avoiding an Intermediate Area 3. Geometric Standards: Geometric design

(d) Densely populated area. parameters also effect the construction of roads.

[ 271 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

4. Resisting Length: The ineffective rise and 1. By IRC method

excessive fall should be minimum. Plain and rolling Terrain (Rate (N) = 1 in 150)

v2 V2
LS2  35  2.7
 Gradient is the rate of rise or fall along the length R R
of the road wrt the Steep and Hilly Terrain (Rate (N) = 1 in 60)
horizontal.
 Ruling gradients: It is the maximum gradient v2 V2
LS2  12.96 
with which designer attempts to design the vertical R R
profile of the road. It is use in design.
2. Rate of change of centrifugal acceleration
 Exceptional gradient: These are given at (driver’s comfort criteria)
unavoidable situations. They are limited to a stretch
of 100 m in a single run. v 3 0.0215V 3
LS1   v  m / sec, R  m
 Limiting gradient: It is to be adopted when ruling cR cR
gradient results in very high increase in cost of
construction due to cutting and filling. 80
C= , V  km/hr, 0.5  C  0.8, C m/
75+V
Special Points:
sec 3
(a) Minimum gradient considered with drainage
point of view, According to IRC, Earthern 3. Rate of introduction of super elevation
Road -1 in 200, Bitumen Road - 1 in 250, Brick e(W+We)N
Road - 1 in 250 to 1 in 300, Cement Road - 1 LS3  (Rotation of outer edge
2
in 500
about the center line)
(b) At hairpin Bends, The gradient is restricted to
2.5% LS3  eN (W + We) (Rotation of pavement
(c) Critical length of the grade is the maximum about inner edge)
length of the ascending gradient which a loaded Length of transition curve L S = max
truck can operate without reduction in speed
(LS1 , LS2 , LS3 )
of more than 25 km/hr.
Grade compensation: It is reduction in vertical
LS 2
gradient due to the horizontal curve, which is intended Special point: Shift ‘s’ =
to off set the extra tractive effort involved at the 24R
curve. When a transition curve is introduced between
30  R straight & circular curve, then the circular curve has
Grade compensation = %, R  Radius of
R to be shifted inwards so that transition curve meets
curve in m the circular curve tangentially.
75
Maximum value = % (No compensation is Summit-Curve: These are vertical curves with
R
required if grade is flatter than 4%) convexity upwards.
 Generally parabolic curves are used as
Transition curve: When a vehicle travelling on a summit curves.
straight road ( infinite radius) enters a curve of fi-  It’s design is governed by criteria of sight
distance.
nite radius.Then, it is suddenly subjected to the cen-
 Circular curves offer equal sight distance at
trifugal force which causes shock & sway. For every point on the curve.
avoiding this, it is necessary to provide a transition  Highest point on the summit cuirve always
curve at the beginning of the circular curve, (having lie on the side of flatter gradient.
a radius equal to infinity at the end of the straight Valley Curves: These are the vertical curves having
end) s& gradually reducing the radius to the radius convexity downards. Its design is governed by comfort
of circular curve where the curve begins. criteria and safety criteria (Head light criteria).
 Also known as sag curves.
Special Point: IRC recommends Spiral Curve for  Generally cubic parabola is preferred for vertical
horizontal transition. valley curve. But IRC recommended square
parabola.
Length of horizontal transition curve

[ 272 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

Road Drainage System vapour. Although sub-surface drainage helps in

Well designed and well maintained road drainage is removal of gravitational water, it is designed to keep
important in order to: minimum moisture in sub-grade.

1. Ensure the speedy removal of surface water to Cross Drainage

enhance safety and minimize disruption to road users. For streams crossing the runways, drainage needs
2. Minimize the environmental impact of road runoff to be provided. Also often the water from the side
on the receiving water environment. drain is taken across by these across drains in order
to divert the water away from the road, to a water
3. Maximize the longevity of the road surface and
course or valley in the form of culverts or bridges.
associated infra-structures.
When a small stream crosses a road with linear
Surface Drainage water way less than amount 6 m, the cross drainage
The surface water is to be collected and then structure provided is called culvert; for higher value
disposed off. The water on the surface is first of linear waterway, the structure is called bridge.
collected in longitudinal drains, generally in side drains
& then the water is disposed off at the nearest
1. Whichone of the followingis the chronological sequence
stream, valley or water course. For the preparation
in regard to road construction/design/development ?
of surface drainage, we should keep in mind various
(a) Telford, Tresaguet, CBR, Macadam
things:
(b) Tresaguet, Telford, Macadam, CBR
1. Collection of Surface Water: Seeing the amount
(c) Macadam, CBR, Tresaguet, Telford
of rainfall and slope a suitable camber is to be
provided for collection of surface water. The (d) Tresaguet, Macadam, Telford, CBR
shoulders of rural roads are constructed with suitable 2. The length of National Highways as per 3rd 20
cross slopes so that the water is drained across the year (Lucknow) road plan is given by
shoulders to the side drains. These side drains of (a) Area of the country/75
rural roads are generally open (kutcha) drains of (b) Area of the country/50
trapezoidal shape, cut to suitable cross-section & (c) Area of the country/40
longitudinal slopes. These sides are provided parallel
(d) Area of the country/25
to the road alignment and hence these are also
3. The star and grid pattern of road network was
known as longitudinal drains. In embankments, the
adopted in
longitudinal drains are provided on one or both sides
beyond the toe; in cutting drains are installed on (a) Nagpur Road Plan
either side of the formation. (b) Lucknow Road Plan
In urban roads because of the limitation of land width (c) Bombay Road Plan
& also due to the presence of footpath, dividing island (d) Delhi Road Plan
and other road facilities, it is necessary to provide
Sol.1(b):
underground longitudinal drains. Water drained from
the pavement surface can be carried forward in the Development of Highway
longitudinal direction between the kerb & the Roman Roads  Tresaguet construction  Metcalf
pavement for short distances which may be collected construction  Telford constructions  Macadam
construction.
in catch pits at suitable intervals and lead through
John Macadam (1756-1836) was the first person
underground pipes. Drainage of surface water is to put forward a concept in which he suggested that
more important in hill roads. In hill roads, disposal heavy foundation stones are not required at all at the
of water is also very important. bottom layer.
2. Sub-Surface Drinage: Change in moisture Method Year Country
content of sub-grade are caused by fluctuations in (1) Tresaguet 1764 AD France
ground water seepage flow percolation of rain water (2) Telford 1803 AD England
& movement of capillary water and even water
(3) Macadam 1815 AD England

[ 273 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

Basic Conversion earthwork for embankment is per m3 .

(Length) (v) The maximum depth of borrow pit and
horizontal distance between two borrow pits
1 meter = 3.281 ft; 1ft = 0.3048 m is 30 to 60cm. and 5m
1 km = 0.622 mile; 1mile = 1.6093 km (vi) Number of Bricks using flat soling & edge
1cm = 0.394 in; 1 inch = 2.54 cm soling (using conventional brick) 38 & 56
1 mm = 1000  (micron) 1micron () = 10- respectively in 1 m2.
6
m (vii) For doors & window, we use 6 & 4 hold fast
(Area) respectively.
1m = 10.764 ft ;
2 2
1ft2 = 0.0929 m2 (viii) Truck: No. of bricks = 4000, volume of sand
1 km2 = 106 m2 = 100ha; = 3-5 m3 (generally)
1 ha = 104m2 = 2.47 acres; 1 acre = 4840sq (ix) In steel roof truss about 5% of steel volume is
yards = 0.4047ha provided for Rivets & Bolts.
(Volume and Discharge) (x) When the ground is fairly uniform, 'Deadman”
1m3 = 35.307 ft3; 1ft3 = 0.028232m3 or “Tell-Tales” shall be left at suitable intervals to
1cumec = 35.307cusecs; 1cusec = 0.02832 determine the average depth of excavation.
cumec  Formula for weight of steel bar per meter length
= (d2/162) kg.
1ha.m = 8.13 acre ft;
Degree of Accuracy - Wood Work: 2mm, Weight
1m3 = 1000litres (L) 1gallon = 4.546
– 1 kg, length – 1 cm, Area – 0.01 m2, Volume – 0.01
litres
m3
 The first stage of construction is the initiation of
 Dimensions shall be measured to the nearest of
the proposal
0.01 m except for slab(0.005m).
Description Unit Estimation of electrical wiring is prepared on the
Stone/Brick Work, Wood Work/Sunshade m3
Shutter, panal, batten m2
basis of the number of points
Pointing, Soling, DPC, Plastering, door, window m2 1. Number of ceiling fan points. 2. Number of
Dressing of stone/Half Brick wall/partition wall m2
Painting Work/Distemper/Colour Washing/Jali Work m2
tube lights points.
3. Number of plug points etc. 4. Number of
 Indian WC size , Cleaning & fixing Glass panel – ordinary lamps points
No.
 Dados ( including raking dados) & glazing is
DEDUCTIONS
measured in m2 No deductions are made for the following in masonry
 Skirting shall be measured in running metres, stat- work:
ing height. 1. Openings or holes having area upto or less than
 Cutting of tree - No., Lime concrete in Jefferies 1000 cm2 or 0.1 m2.
of roof terracing-(m2). 2. Bed plate, wall plate, bearing of weather sheds
Binding wire (Steel work) - Binding wire re- (chajjas) etc. having depth not exceeding 10 cm.
quired for (1000 kg) of reinfrocement = 9 to 13 kg 3. Bearings of floor & roof slabs are not deducted
(depending upon diameter of bar). Greater the diam- from the wall masonry.
eter of bar, lesser will be the weight of binding wire 4. Cement concrete blocks for holdfasts etc.
required. 5. Ends of beams, posts, rafters, purlins, etc. upto
500 cm2 or 0.05 m2 in section.
Special points: 6. Iron fixture as wall ties, pipes upto 300 mm di-
(i) Order of Booking the Dimension in MB = L, ameter & holdfasts for door and windows.
B, H Deduction for opening, bearings etc. in concrete
(ii) If depth of excavation < 30 cm, surface work: No deductions are made for the following in
excavation (unit m2) the concrete work:
(iii) In Earthwork, Lead & Lift is 30 m & 1.5 m 1. Volume occupied by the reinforcing bars.
respectively. 2. Ends of joists, purlins, trusses, etc. having cross-
(iv) Surface dressing up to 15 cm depth and sectional area less than 500 cm2 or 0.05 m2.
surface excavation up to 3. Volume occupied by conduits of pipes having
30 cm depth measurements for payments is in cross-sectional area less than 25 cm2.
the square meter. The unit of payment for the 4. Openings or holes having area less than 0.10 m2.

[ 322 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

5. Small voids not exceeding 40 cm2 in area, moulds, assets that an individual holds (such as car, plot
stops, rounded ends, junctions, etc. etc.)
Deduction for opening should be made in following
Gross income = Net Income + Outgoing
way
• No deduction is made for the ends of beams, Types of outgoing
posts, rafters etc. (a) Taxation (b)Repairness – (10 – 15)%
• For small opening upto 0.5 m2, no deduction is of total Income
made & at the same time, no additions are made for (c) Management and collection Charge – (5 –
10)% of total Income.
jambs, soffits and sills of these opening.
• For opening in the range 0.5 m2 to 3 m2,  The charges/expenditures represented directly in
the commodity produced is known as prime cost &
deduction is made for one side and other face is
other expenditures like as rent, salaries & services,
allowed for jambs soffits & sills which are not management, depreciation etc. represented indirectly
consider separately. in the production of the commodity are called the
• For opening above 3 m2, deduction is made for supplementary costs.
both faces of the opening and the jambs, soffits &
sills are considered Mortgage:

VALUATION An owner can borrow money (by loan) against

security of his property.
Mortgagor  person who takes the loan
 Valuation is the Technique for determining the fair Mortgagee  person who advances /gives the loan
price of a property/structure. Mortgage deed  Document for the mortgage
 The term cost is used to indicate the actual amount transaction
incurred in producing a commodity which possesses
some value. Annuity
 The term price is used to indicate the cost of com- The annual payments (paid in months or year) paid
modity + profit of the manufacturer. for capital amount invested party.
 A price is a fact, which has already occured in (a) Annuity Due: The amount paid at the
practice & a value indicates the estimation of a prob- beginning of each period or year for definite
able price of a commodity. number of intervals.
 Purpose of Valuation
(b) Perceptual Annuity: The payments of the
(a) Taxation– (10–14%) (b)Rent fixation – (6 annuity continue for indefinite period (no end)
–10% of total value)
(c) Deffered Annuity: The payments of the
(c) Security/Loan/Mortage etc. annuity begined after some years
Driect Tax
Note:- When payment of a debt is made by a series
We Pro Com in of equal periodic payments. It is known as
Almortization.
Wealth tax Property tax Commercial tax Income Tax
Capital Cost
ExCuSE mE ( Indirect Tax ) Total amount required to possess a property.
Ex - Excise tax, Cu - Custom tax, S - Service tax, = Land Cost + Construction Cost ( when
E - Entertainment tax
buying a land)
 Municipality tax is a tax assessed & levied by
= Market Value (  when buying a whole
a local authority like as a country or municipal- property)
ity.  Insurance premium = 1/2%of gross income
 A sales tax is a tax paid to a governing body  Miscellaneous charges = 2 % of gross income
for the sales of certain goods & services.
Capitalized Value
 A property tax is a tax on the value of a prop-
It is the amount of money whose annual interest
erty, generally levied on real estate. (generally @high rate of interest) will be equal to
• Wealth tax is a tax on the market value of the net annual income from the property.

[ 323 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

Capitalized value = Net annual income x Year's Absolute property: An absolute title also called
purchase as a perfect title to a property is free to any encum-
brances or deficiencies.
Year's Purchase (Y.P)
An absolute title gives unequivocal right of owner-
The capital sum required to be invested in order to ship to the owner & it can not be disputed or chal-
receive annuity of Rs. 1 @ some rate of interest. lenged by anyone else.
100 Contract Completion Date:
Year's Purchase =
Rate of Interest Completion date = Original change order additional
 1  days of completion + Time Extensions + Extension
Year’s purchase =  I  I  for date constructive changes
 P C
Scrap Value
W h e r e ,
(a) It is about 10% of total value.
 I P  Rate of Interest for Year's purchase  (b) It is the value of Dismentled Material.
  (c) It is the value of asset when its utility is
 IC  Sinking fund Coefficient 
considered to be as junk or scrap. Ex. Selling
Types of Property of vehicle after severe accidents, now vehicle
There are two types of properties namely: can not be used as whole but some parts can
be used.
(a) Free hold property:
Special Points:
 The free hold inherent the absolute owner of the (i) It may be positive, negative & zero.
property. He holds it without any payment in the (ii) For RCC structure, it is always –ve.
nature of the rent. He may sell the property, divide
it or grant it or donate it on lease at his own will. Salvage Value (Resale Value)
 The freehold or owner who grants the lease  The property after being discarded at the end of
known as 'lessor' and leaseholder is known as utility period, is sold as it is, without being broken
lessee'. into pieces & amount released after substracting
 In common practice, it give for 15, 21,25 or 50 its cost of removal & sale, is called as salvage
years, when a lease is granted for a period of 99 value of the property.
years' it is known as long term lease & when it is Ex. The Railway sleeper may be reused as ports of a
for 999 years, it is said to be for endless duration. fencing or as buffer stops etc.
(b) Leasehold Property: Sinking Fund
The leaseholder is known as leasee and holds the S.i.
physical possesion (under) of the property for the Annual Installment (I) =  IC .S
(1  i)n  1
definite period under terms and condition specified in where, S – Total Sinking fund, i – Rate of Interest,
the lease document. n – Utility period, Ic  Sinking fund coefficient.
The different types of leases: Book Value: It is the amount show in the account
 Building lease Life lease book after allowing permissible depreciation. At the
Occupation lease end of utility period, it will be equal to Scrap value. It
 Sub - lease Perceptual lease is not affected by market conditions. Hence, it
Easement: Easement are the rights & privileges represents the actual book cost.
which one owner of property enjoys through or over Book value  Initial cos t  Depreciation cos t
the property another.
Special Point: Not all the assets do not depreciate
Saleable property: As name subjected it is that
with time, example land & sometimes even gold,
area of property which is saleable generally super
platinum etc.
built-up area is saleable area.  The net annual value of property, which is
 When the any Property structure comes under obtained after deducting the amount of yearly
any development area. Then there is high increase repairs from the gross income, is termed as
in value of that property/ structure, such type of rateable value. All property tax apply on
value is called Accomodation value. rateable value

[ 324 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

 Rateable value = Gross income – Annual repair/ maintenance and mode of use. It varies with
Maintenance cost age.
Distress Value: It is that value of property which (c) There are various methods for calculating the
is usually cheap price because its owner or its care- amount of depreciation.
taker want to sell it forcefully due to some reasons
like as fear of war, riots, financial problem etc. So, it Obsolescence
is cheap value or lowest value than its money ob- (a) This is the functional loss in the value of the
tained to sale in open market. property due to change in design, structure,
Sentimental Value:The value of an object de- fashion, utility, demand etc.
riving from personal or emotional associations rather (b) It depends upon the technological advancement
than material worth. So, it is priceless value. It can art etc. It does not depend on age.
fetch more money from market than any other. (c) No method is available for calculation of
The extra price which is demanded by vendor when obsolescence.
he attaches certain sentiments to his property is called
Depletion:
as sentimental value.
Depletion for a year =
Depreciation
It is the gradual deduction of usefulness of a property.
cos t of property  units sold during that year
Types of Depreciation: No. of units in the property
(a) Physical Depreciation: Wear & tear of an
asset. Special points -If contractor fails to perform the
(b) Contingent depreciation: Accident due to work successfully or discontinues the work before
liabilities, diseases etc. completion of the period of agreement, the agency
(c) Functional Depreciation: Obsolescene due to handles that work at same cost is known as
change in structure, design, fashion etc. debitable agency.
 In the construction industry, contractor's profit is
(a) Straight line Method: included in unit rate of items.
Assume depreciation by same amount
CS
D= TECHNICAL SANCTION
n Following are the power of accepting the tender.
 It is used for all the assets which do not
get obsolate during its utility period. ex-civil
Designation upto
Engg. equipment.
(b) Constant percentage Method: Also called Chief Engineer Full power
Declining Balance Method. It assume Superintending Engineer 50 Lakh
depreciation by same percentage. Executive Engineer 10 lakh
s
1/ n Sub Divisional Engineer (20-40)k
D = 1   Junior Engineer X
c
 It is most suitable for assets which have
probability/fear of obsolence before its
utility period. ex-electronic equipments.
Note: This method cannot be used when Schedule of Rate: It is the document which contain
salvage value is zero. current price details per unit excluding quantity of
Material.
(c) Sinking fund method
(d) Quantity Survey Method. Quantity Survey:- It is a schedule or list of quanti-
ties of all the possible items required for the construc-
Difference Between Depreciation and tion of any structure
Obsolescence:
 It should be noted that quantity survey mentions all
Depreciation the items in the estimate. But it does not give the list
(a) This is the physical loss in the value of property of materials required.
due to wear and tear and decay etc.
 All these quantities are worked out by reading the
(b) It depends upon its original condition, quality of plans of structure. Ex. - Cement plaster as m2, but

[ 325 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

not no. of bag etc. It is an most accurate & reliable method.It

 If the distance between construction site and consists of working out the quantities of each item
source of material is more than 8 km (5 mile), of works and working the cost.
then Transportation charge should be consider.
• Building cost Index is an index number that
 The information which can not be included in
measures the average rate of input construction
drawing is conveyed to the estimator through
specifications. cost changes of categorized building in
Work Classification (On Cost Basis) comparison with that of the reference month.
Special point: Degree of Accuracy (descreasing
order)
Minor Work Petty Work Detailed > Cube rate > Plinth area > Rough
Major Work
(> 2 Lakh) (50 K – 2 lakh) (Upto 50 k) estimate
Over Head Cost Revise estimate: Estimate is revised If
It is indirect/irregular cost of a project (a) When the expenditure of work exceeds
General Overhead Job Overhead Cost by more than 10% of the administrative
approval.
Telephone Bill Salary Delay
Travelling charges Establishment of Office (b) When a sanctioned estimate's variation
is more than 5% due to any cause except im-
Printing, Post office Compensation
portant structural alterations.
 The quantity of dry distemper required for a
Annual Maintenance & Repair Estimate:-
single coat over area of 100 m2 is 6.5 kg
 1 cu. ft. water is equal to 28.31 liter Also called Maintenance estimate. It includes the de-
tailed estimate of all possible items which are to be
Turn Out: Task Work per day is also called labour executed every year to maintain the structure or
constant. project in working condition.
It is the amount of work Done by a skill person in a
day. Ex. For building - white washing, patching to cracked
plaster, replacement of units of daily services etc.
Types of Estimate
For road works - repairs of culverts & bridges, patch
• Preliminary or Approximate Estimate or
repairing & renewals etc.
Abstract Estimate:
It is required for preliminary studies of various  The repair work which are usually carried out at
every fourth year are called as Quadrennial repair
aspect of a project or work, to decide the works.
financial position & policy for administrative
action by the competent authority.  Special repair estimate prepared for renovation
or renewal of structures or damaged works or minor
 In it various quantities are worked out with changes in the buildings.
the help of many short
Ex. - Repair of flood damaged structure, renewal of
cuts. floors, roofs etc.
 It is an estimate which is very near to final esti- Area
mate.
Plinth area Floor area
• Plinth Area Estimate:Square Meter Method
Circulation area Carpet area
This is prepared on the basis of plinth area (B
L) of building. Vertical circulation area
Horizontal circulation area
• Cube Rate Estimate:
It is prepared on the basis of the cubical contents Types of Area
(LBH) of the building. 1. Plinth Area: It is the built-up Covered area of a
building at floor level of a story.
• Detailed or Item Rate Estimate:
 Courtyard, play ground, unclosed Balcony,
cantilever porch, lift (area > 2m2) is not included

[ 326 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

in plinth area.
2. Floor area: Type of Buildings
F.A. = Plinth area – area occupied by walls/
As per National Building code of India, building is
Intermediate supports
classified into nine groups based on occupancy as
Area of all floor follows:
F.A. ratio = Area of total plot 100  Group A: Residential Building: Sleeping
accommodation is provided for normal residential
 Area of Balcony included upto 50% in the floor purpose.
area.
 Group B: Educational buildings: Include any
 The plinth area as compared to floor area is building used for shool college etc.
more than 30% to 40%
 Group C: Institutional buildings: Include any
Circulation Area building used for purpose like medical or other
treatment or care of infant, aged person etc. like
sanatoria, nursing home, hospital, orphanage, jails,
mental hospitals etc.
Horizontal Vertical
(Varandaha, Passes 10-15% of P.A.) (Staircase, Lift 4-5% of P.A)  Group D: Assembly buildings: Include any
Carpet Area: Useable area/Living area building like theatre, drama theatre, auditorium,
C.A. = Total floor area – (circulation area + Non- museums, assembly hall, exhibition hall, restaurant,
useable area) place of worship, dance hall, sport stadium, club
 C.A. in residential area (50 – 65)% & in commercial area house, skating rings, gymnasiums etc.
(60 – 75)% of plinth area.  Group E: Business buildings: Include any
building for transaction of business, record for
Technical Section similar purpose etc.
(a) Chief Engineer is the Administrative Head of  Group F: Mercantile buildings: Include any
the Department and directly responsible to building which is used as stores, shop, market for
Govt of India. display and sale for mercantile either whole sale
(b) Each circle is Headed by Superintending or retail.
Engineer (In CPWD, It is also called Surveyor  Group G: Industrial buildings: Include any
Engineer). building in which product or material of all kind
and property are fabricated or assembled such as
Work % Estimate
gas plant, refineries, dairies, smoke house, textile
Departmental charges (centage charge) (10 – 15) mill and saw mill.
Contractor charge 10  Group H: Storage buildings: Include any
Labour Charge 25 buildings for storage or sheltering of goods, wares,
Electrification 8 like ware houses, garage, old storage, etc.
Electric fan 4  Group I: Hazardous buildings: Include any
Sanitary and Water Supply Charge 8 building which is used for storage, handling,
Contigences Charges (3 – 5) manufacturing of highly combustible explosive
Work Charge Establishment (1.5 – 2) material or which are highly toxic in nature etc.
Tools and Plants (1 - 1.5)
Long wall & Short wall Centre line method
Special Points: Only for Water Charges 1.5% Also called individual/separate Required special
wall/general method,use in CPWD attention at the junction point
Activity Percentage Cost Break-Up(Labour) Simple method but time consuming Quick method
RCC 37% More accurate Less accurate
Brick work & Plaster 21% In it, length of long wall descreaseand Length remains constant,
POP 7% short wall increase It is suitable for polygon
Tiling 12%
Plumbing & Sanitation 3% as we move from substructure to shape structure without any
Doors 1% superstructure cross wall
Water Proofing 3%
Painting 8% CIVIL Ki GOLI Team (9255624029)
Electrical 8%
1. Estimate is-
TOTAL 100%
(a) The actual cost of construction of a

[ 327 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

structure 10. How many kilo-litres are there in one cubic

(b) The probable cost arrived at before metre ?
commencement of the structure (a) 0.5 (b) 1
(c) A random guess of the cost of the structure (c) 10 (d) 100
11. The follwoing item of earth work is not mesured
(d) None of the above separately
2. The rate of payment is made for 100 cum (per (a) Cement concrete in foundation
% cum) in case on (b) R.C.C. structure
(a) Earth work in excavation (c) Hollow concrete block wall
(b) Rock Cutting (d) None of these
(c) Excavation in trenches for foundation 12. Approximate weight of 1 cubic metre of sand
(d) All the above is
3. A 16 gauge steel sheet will roughly have (a) 800 kg (b) 1600 kg
thickness equal to (c) 2400 kg (d) 3200 kg
(a) 2.55 mm (b) 2.65 mm 13. The number of bricks (conventional size)
(c) 1.52 mm (d) 1.7 mm required for one square meter of brick on edge
4. What is the least window opening for 30 m3 soling is
inside volume of the room ? (a) 54 (b) 64
(a) 30 m2 (b) 3 m2
(c) 34 (d) 44
(c) 1 m2 (d) 10 m2
14. Indicating works left in excavated trenches to
5. The damp proof course is measured in facilitate the measurement of borrow pits are
(a) Length (b) Area known as_______
(c) Volume (d) Weight (a) Jambs
6. Which of the following does not represent an (b) Posts
activity
(c) Tell- tale
(a) Site located
(d) None of the these
(b) Foundation is being dug
15. For the costruction of buildings the subheads of
(c) The office area is being cleaned
the estimate are
(d) The invitations are being sent
(a) Earthwork, Concrete work, Brick work
7. The measurement is NOT made in square
meter in case of (b) Brickwork, stone work, Roofing
(a) Damp proof course (c) Brickwork, flooring, wood work, steel
(b) Form works work
(c) Concrete Jeffries (d) All the above
(d) R.C Chhajja 16. Arrange the specific weights of Wood (W),
Cement (C), Steel (S) and coarse aggregate
8. The first stage of a construction, is-
(A) in the decreasing order-
(a) Preparation of estimate
(a) W-C-S-A (b) W-C-A-S
(b) Survey of the site
(c) A-S-C-W (d) A-C-S-W
(c) Initiation of proposal
17. An area of one hectare is equal to
(d) Allotment of funds
(a) 10m2 (b) 100m2
9. The cross sectional area of 16 mm steel bar is
(c) None of these (d) 1000000m2
(a) 200 mm 2
(b) 100 mm 2
18. Pick up the correct statement from the following
(c) 256 mm 2
(d) 64 mm2
(a) Pointing is measured in m2

[ 328 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

(b) Plastering is measured in m2 (a) 5% (b) 10%

(c) Glazing is measured in m 2
(c) 15% (d) 20%
(d) All the above 26. While estimating the qualities for the
19. Pick up the incorrect statement from the construction of a building the correct metric unit
following is
(a) No deduction is made for the volume occupied (a) Meter for length
by reinforcement (b) Cubic meter for volume
(b) No deduction is made for the openings upto (c) Square meter for area
0.1 m2
(d) Liter for capcity
(c) No deduction is made for volumes
27. The life of teakwood doors and windows is
occupied by pipes not exceding 100 sq.cm
usually taken to be _____
in cross section
(d) None of these (a) 80 year (b) 60 year

20. Specification for the hold fasts are given in (c) 40 year (d) 20 year
terms of _______ 28. Minimum side lap required for asbestos cement
sheets is
(a) Number (b) Weight
(a) 4 cm (b) 10 cm
(c) Volume (d) Length
(c) 15 cm (d) 25 cm
21. In case of grills, for the estimation of painted
29. End lap provided in asbestos cements is equal
area, the flat area is multiplied by
to
1 (a) 5 cm (b) 10 cm
(a) (b) 1
2 (c) 20 cm (d) 15 cm
1 30. The cross-sections for a highway is taken is
(c) 1 (d) 2 ________
2
22. One metric horse power is equal to (a) Right angle to the centre line
(a) 1.36 kw (b) 0.736 kw (b) 30 meters apart
(c) 1.736 kw (d) 0.75 kw (c) Intermediate points having abrupt change
23. The case of steel rolling shutters, for the in gradient
estimation of painted area, the plane area is (d) All of these
multiplied by 31. When not specified, the volume of steel in R.C.C
3 work is taken as
(a) (b) 1 (a) 1% to 1.6% of RCC volume
4
(b) 2% to 4% of RCC volume
1 1
(c) 1 (d) 1 (c) 4% to 6% of RCC volume
4 2
(d) 0.6% to 1.0% of RCC volume
24. What is the minimum period for which the lime 32. The brick work is not measured in cum in case
concrete in foundation be left wet without the of
start of masonry work over it ?
(a) One or more than one brick wall
(a) 3 days (b) 5 days (b) Brick work in arches
(c) 7 days (d) 15 days (c) Reinforced brick work
25. Whenever colour washing on Asbestos Cement (d) Half brick wall
corrugated sheets is done in the estimation. The 33. The following item of earthwork is not measured
plane area of the sheets is increased by separately _______
_______
(a) Setting out of works

[ 329 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

(b) Site clearance (a) Lead is the average horizontal straight

(c) Dead men distance between the borrow pit and the
place of spreading soil
(d) All options are correct
(b) The lead is calculated for each block of
34. A layer of dry bricks put below the foundation the excavated area
in the case of soft soils, is called-
(c) The unit of lead is 50 m for a distance upto
(a) Soling 500 m
(b) Shoring (d) The unit of lead is 1 km where the lead
(c) D.P.C exceeds 2 km
(d) None of the above 43. Which of the following is the unit of
35. Whenever the whitewashing or distempering is measurement for the sills of windows
done on corrugated iron sheets. In the estimation, (a) Cubic meter
the plan area of the sheets is increased by
(b) Meter
(a) 2% (b) 7%
(c) Number
(c) 14% (d) 10%
36. The unit weight of R.C.C in kg/m3 is (d) Square meter

(a) 1200 (b) 1800 44. In the case of roof truss made up of steel; rivets,
bolts and nuts usually account for
(c) 2400 (d) 3000
(a) 1% (b) 5%
37. The expected out turn (squre metre) of sawing
(c) 10% (d) 15%
of the soft wood per mason per day is _______
45. Which of the following is not a common size of
(a) 2.5 (b) 10
reinforcement bars ?
(c) 8.5 (d) 5.5 (a) 16 mm (b) 20 mm
38. The quantity of soling is obtained in (c) 25 mm (d) 28 mm
(a) m 3
(b) m 46. The number of corrugations in a galvanised
(c) Lump-sum (d) m2 corrugated sheet is usually
39. The quantity of wood for the shutters of doors (a) 6 (b) 8
and windows is calculated in (c) 10 (d) 12
(a) m2 (b) m3 47. The area is measured correct to the nearest
(c) Lump-sum (d) m (a) 0.01 sqm (b) 0.02 sqm
40. For supply, lime is measured in ___ (c) 0.03 sqm (d) 0.04 sqm
(a) Bags of 50 kg (b) Cubic meter 48. Which of the following is NOT measured in
(c) Kilograms (d) Quintals square metre ?
41. Pick up the incorrect statement from the (a) Drip course
following (b) Pointing
(a) Lead is the average horizontal straight
(c) Shuttering
distance between the borrow pit and the
place of spreading soil (d) Damp proof course
(b) The lead is calculated for each block of 49. The nominal lead and lift allowed for the
the excavated area earthwork in the excavations of the foundations
are
(c) The unit of lead is 50 m for a distance upto
500 m (a) 50 m and 2 m
(d) The unit of lead is 1 km where the lead (b) 30 m and 2 m
exceeds 2 km (c) 30 m and 1.5 m
42. Pick up the incorrect statement from the (d) 20 m and 1 m
following 50. Cleaning and fixing of glass panel is measured

[ 330 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

UKSSSC DRAFTSMAN ( CIVIL )

2017
1. The ratio of M200 grade concrete is - (a) Permanent canals (b) Ridge canals
(a) 1 : 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 2 : 4 (c) Perennial canals (d) Ice canals

1 1 8. The diameter of a reinforcement bar is ‘d’

(c) 1:1 : 3 (d) 1: 2 : 5 the anchorage value of the hook is -
2 2
(a) 4d (b) 8d
 v2  (c) 12d (d) 16d
2. This relation shows :  gR  e  µ 
  9. In some cases the beam provided above
the slab is called as -
(a) Camber (b) Super elevation
(a) Main Beam (b) T-Beam
(c) Carriage way (d) Sight distance
(c) Inverted T-Beam (d) Continuous beam
3. The maximum quantity of water to be
added per 50kg. of cement for making 10. The pH value of water to be used in con-
M100 grade of concrete - crete shell generally be -
(a) 34 Litres (b) 32 Litres (a) Not more than 7 (b) Not less than 6
(c) 30 Litres (d) 25 Litres (c) Not less than 5 (d) Not more than 6

4. Formula for tensile strength of per pitch 11. The depth of foundation is calculated by
length of a joint is - using the Rankine’s formula, which is -
(a) Pt = (b - d) /t. at 2 2
P  1  sin   P  1  sin  
(b) Pt = (b - d) + (t. at) (a)   (b)  
W  1  sin   W  1  sin  
(c) Pt = (b - d) t. at
(d) Pt = (d - b) t. at P  1  sin  
2
P  1  sin  
(c)   (d) W   1  sin  
5. According to M.K.S. System, the diam- 2W  1  sin    
eter of a rivet is -
12. Vicat’s apparatus is used to determine-
(a) d  605 t (b) d  60.5 t (a) Gradation of Aggregate
(b) Fineness Modulus of Cement
(c) d  0.605 t (d) d  6.05 t
(c) Normal Consistency of Cement
6. California Bearing Ratio (CBR) is -
(d) None of these
(a) A measure of soil strength
13. Property of quick setting in cement is due
(b) A procedure for designing flexible pave- to-
ment
(a) Magnesia (b) Silica
(c) A method of soil identification
(c) Alumina (d) Calcium Sulphate
(d) None of the above
14. Thickness of Asphalt floor is-
7. Canals taken off from ice-fed perennial
(a) 10-15 mm (b) 20 - 30 mm
river are known as -
(c) 30 - 40 mm (d) 85 mm

[ 348 ]
 [ S. Sorout , Whatsapp - 9255624029 ]
15. When the stones are used directly ob- 22. Extra length required for four bent up and
tained from quarry, the masonry is called- hooks is-
(a) Rubble Masonry (a) 9 (b) 24
(b) Ashlar Masonry (c) 18 (d) 12
(c) Composite Masonry 23. According is IS 456 : 2000, the spacing
(d) None of the above between vertical stirrups is kept-

16. Which command is used for removing ex- (a) 0.75 d (b) 0.50 d
tra line in drawing? (c) 0.25 d (d) 0.85 d
(a) Trim command 24. The tensile strength of mild steel is-
(b) Move command (a) 1400 to 1800 kg/cm2
(c) Extend command (b) 1800 to 2500 kg/cm2
(d) None of the above (c) 4200 to 5400 kg/cm2
17. Generally ‘Pile Foundation’ is considered (d) 5500 to 5700 kg/cm2
best for-
25. Total chambers are in Hoffman’s kiln-
(a) Bridge
(a) 5 (b) 10
(b) Multi-storey building
(c) 12 (d) 15
(c) Residential building
26. For Soundness Test of cement, the appa-
(d) Run-way
ratus used is-
18. Radius of gyration of a circular section is- (a) Le-chatelier (b) Vicat’s apparatus
(a) d / 12 (b) d / 18 (c) U.T.M. (d) C.B.R.
27. To make the letters in inclined alphabet
(c) d / 24 (d) d/4
at the following degrees angle-
19. ‘Lead and Lift’ is the term used in- (a) 0° to 90° (b) 0° to 50°
(a) Earth work (c) 30° to 45° (d) 67 1/2° to 75°
(b) Salvage value
28. The modulus of Elastic of mild steel in ap-
(c) Tender notification proximately equal to-
(d) None of the above (a) 0.1 × 105 N/mm2 (b) 0.8 × 105 N/mm2
20. The place where contour lines meet at (c) 1.0 × 105 N/mm2 (d) 2.1 × 105 N/mm2
right angle is known as-
29. The area of any irregular figure of the plot-
(a) Valley (b) Cliff ted map is measured with-
(c) Ridge (a) Pentagraph (b) Clinometer
(d) Valley and Ridge both (c) Planimeter (d) Padometer
21. Which instrument is used in plane table 30. If R is the radius of main curve and L is
survey for the measurement of horizontal the length of transition curve. The shift of
and vertical distances directly? the curve is-
(a) Plain Alidade (b) Telescopic Alidade (a) L2/24R (b) L/24R2
(c) Tacheometer (d) Clinometer (c) L2/4R (d) None of the above

[ 349 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

31. On cement concrete roads, the camber is (a) 1000 × 1500 × 25 mm

generally provided- (b) 1000 × 700 × 25 mm
(a) 1 in 20 to 1 in 24 (b) 1 in 30 to 1 in 48 (c) 700 × 500 × 15 mm
(c) 1 in 48 to 1 in 60 (d) 1 in 60 to 1 in 72 (d) 500 × 350 × 15 mm

Strength of joint × 100 39. The correct unit of momentum is-

32. Solid plate strength of joint % is a formula (a) Kg.Second (b) Kg/Second
for- (c) Kg Metre
(a) Tearing strength of plate (d) Kg. Metre/Second
(b) Bearing strength of joint 40. Reynolds Number is the ratio of linertial
(c) Efficiency of joint force to-

(d) Double cover butt joint (a) Surface tension (b) Gravitational force
(c) Viscous force (d) None of the above
33. The conventional sign of stone masonry is-
41. F.A.R. means in reference to a building is-
(a) (b) (a) Flat Area Ratio (b) Floor Area Ratio
(c) (a) and (b) both (d) None of the above
(c) (d)
42. Symbol for celing fan is-

34. Length of Revenue Chain is-

(a) (b)
(a) 100 feet (b) 33 feet
(c) 66 feet (d) None of the above
(c) (d)
35. This symbol indicates-
43. If coordinates of two points A and B are-
Points Coordinates
N E
A 500.25 640.75
B 840.78 3150.6
(a) Shower head (b) Shower stall
(a) 676.4 m (b) 500.0 m
(c) Urinal floor (d) Pump
(c) 480.7 m (d) 470.8 m
36. The crushing strength of first class bricks
44. The initial setting time of Ordinary Port-
is-
land Cement (OPC) is-
(a) 105 Kg/cm2 (b) 150 Kg/cm2
(a) 10 minute (b) 30 minute
(c) 70 Kg/cm2 (d) 300 Kg/cm2
(c) 45 minute (d) 60 minute
37. The minimum grade of reinforced con-
45. The fixed point whose elevation is known
crete in sea water as per IS 456 : 2000 is-
is called-
(a) M15 (b) M20
(a) Benchmark (b) Change point
(c) M30 (d) M40
(c) Reduced level (d) Station
38. The size of B1 Drawing Board as per B.I.S.
46. The grade of concrete M20 means that
is-
characteristics compressive strength of
[ 350 ]
 [ S. Sorout , Whatsapp - 9255624029 ]
15 cm cubes after 28 days given by- (a) Sugar
(a) 10 N/mm 2
(b) 15 N/mm 2
(b) Sodium Bi-carbonate
(c) 20 N/mm 2
(d) 25 N/mm 2
(c) Calcium chloride
47. Calcium chloride added in a concrete acts (d) Starch
as-
56. Factors affecting workability of concrete
(a) Air entraining agent (b) Plasticizer is/are-
(c) Retarder (d) Accelerator (a) Water content
48. Which one of the following has least bear- (b) Shape of aggregate
ing capacity? (c) Size of aggregate
(a) Soft rocks (b) Compact gravel (d) All of the above
(c) Loose gravel (d) Hard rocks
57. Compressive strength of Ordinary Port-
49. Turpentine oil is used in paint as a- land Cement (OPC) after 3 days should
(a) Base (b) Caries not less than-

(c) Dries (d) Thinner (a) 50 kg/cm2 (b) 100 kg/cm2

(c) 115 kg/cm2 (d) 150 kg/cm2
50. Most important constituent of cement are-
(a) C3S and C2S (b) C2A and C4AF 58. Which of the following is not a type of
Bolt?
(c) C2A and C2S (d) C2S and C3A
(a) Fish Bolt (b) Hook Bolt
51. An azimuth is a-
(c) Fang Bold (d) Screw Bolt
(a) True bearing
59. Scale plate of a theodolite is-
(b) Magnetic bearing
(a) Upper plate
(c) Arbitrary bearing
(b) Lower plate
(d) None of the above
(c) Both of the above
52. Shrinkage in a concrete slab-
(d) None of the above
(a) Causes shear cracks
60. Relation between Young Modules () and
(b) Causes tension cracks
Modulus of Rigidity (N) is given-
(c) Causes compression cracks
(a) = 3N(1 + µ) (b) = 2N(1 – µ)
(d) None of the above
(c) = 2N(1 + µ) (d) = 3N(1 – )
53. At lower pH, the contact period required
61. Wastage of timber is maximum in case of-
for chlorination is-
(a) Ordinary sawing
(a) Lower (b) Higher
(b) Tangential sawing
(c) Same (d) None of the above
(c) Radial sawing
54. When plastic index of soil is zero, soil is-
(d) Quarter sawing
(a) Sand (b) Silt
62. For checking the length of bricks as per
(c) Silty sand (d) Clay
Indian Standard, how many bricks are to
55. Admixture which can be used as an accel- be taken?
erator in concrete is- (a) 10 (b) 11

[ 351 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

(c) 20 (d) 26 Auto CAD?

63. A line joining some fixed points on main (a) BMP (b) dwg
survey lines is called- (c) cad (d) xis
(a) Check line (b) Tie line 71. A circular steel bar of 20 mm diameter car-
(c) Chain line (d) Base line ries a tensile load of 30 KN. If E= 2 × 105
N/mm2, the elongation in the 30 cm length
64. Lime stabilization is very effective in treat-
of bar will be-
ing-
(a) 0.0143 mm (b) 0.1430 mm
(a) Sandy soil (b) Silty soil
(c) 1.43 mm (d) 14.30 mm
(c) None plastic soil (d) Plastic soil
72. The unit of strain is-
65. Constituent of cement responsible for ini-
tial setting time duration of cement- (a) N/mm2 (b) N/mm
(a) Dicalcium silicate (c) No unit (d) mm
(b) Tricalcium silicate 73. Calculated quantity of earth work in exca-
(c) Tricalcium Aluminate vation for foundation of a room 4.20 × 3.60
m. wall thickness is 30 cm, Breadth of
(d) All of the above
foundation 90 cm and depth of excavation
66. In highway construction on super elevated 1 m is-
curves, the rolling shall proceed from- (a) 15.12 m2 (b) 14.04 m3
(a) Sides towards the centre (c) 16.20 m3 (d) None of the above
(b) Centre towards the side
74. In analysis of rates, contractor profit is
(c) Lower edge towards upper edge taken at the rate of-
(d) Upper edge towards lower edge (a) 1% (b) 10%
67. Type of suspension bridge from the follow- (c) 15% (d) 5%
ing is-
75. Sanitary installation are provided accord-
(a) Sling bridge (b) Ramp bridge ing to IS-
(c) (a) and (b) both (d) None of the above (a) IS : 1172 - 1963 (b) IS : 2064 - 1993
68. Gypsum is added to cement in small quan- (c) IS : 962 - 1967 (d) IS : 2470
tity to-
76. In the whole circle bearing system
(a) Increase final setting time
N 44o 30 ' W will be expressed as-
(b) Make cement hydrophobic
(c) Give colour to cement (a) 315o30 ' (b) 224 o 30 '

(d) Increase initial setting time (c) 344 o 30 ' (d) 255o 30 '
69. The trimmed size of A1 drawing paper is- 77. The last staff reading in any set up of the
(a) 420 mm ×= 594 mm Instrument and Indicate shifting the in-
(b) 841 mm × 1189 mm strument is-
(c) 297 mm × 210 mm (a) Back sight (b) Fore sight
(d) 594 mm × 841 mm (c) Change point (d) Intermediate point

70. What is the extension of files created in 78. In a Vernier Theodolite, the Lest Count

[ 352 ]
 [ S. Sorout , Whatsapp - 9255624029 ]
is- umn if ratio of its unsupported length be-
tween its least lateral dimension is more
(a) 15'' 25'' (b) 2'' 10''
than-
(c) 5'' 10 '' (d) 10'' 20'' (a) 125 (b) 60
79. The end support of a bridge super struc- (c) 25 (d) 150
ture is known as-
88. Partial Safety Factor of concrete is-
(a) Abutment (b) Pier
(a) 1.15 (b) 1.67
(c) Wing wall (d) Retaining wall
(c) 1.5 (d) 1.77
80. If the width of canal is 1.00 m, then the
89. The under surface of an arch, is called-
free board will be given-
(a) Soffit (b) Intrados
(a) 0.35 m (b) 0.75 m
(c) Haunch (d) Back
(c) 0.30 m (d) 0.60 m
90. The Cavity Wall generally provided for-
81. Beam, in which one end is fixed and other
end is free is called- (a) Preventing dampness

(a) Fixed beam (b) Secondary beam (b) Heat insulation

(c) Rectangular beam (d) Cantilever beam (c) Sound insulation

(d) All of the above
82. The clear cover in slab should not be less
than- 91. The bearing capacity of soil can be im-
(a) 20 mm (b) 25 mm proved by-

(c) 15 mm (d) 10 mm (a) Increasing the depth of footing

(b) Draining of sub-soil water
83. For all type of general R.C.C. work, the
recommended proportion of material (Ce- (c) Ramming the granular material like crust
ment : Sand : Aggregates) is- stone in the soil

(a) 1 : 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 1.5 : 3 (d) All of the above

(c) 1 : 3 : 5 (d) 1 : 2 : 4 92. A temporary rigid structure having plat-

forms to enable labours to work at differ-
84. On increasing the Quantity of carbon in
ent stage of a building, is known as-
steel, one of the following will decrease.
(a) Scaffolding
(a) Capability (b) Hardness
(b) Dead shore
(c) Brittleness (d) Tensility
(c) Raking shore
85. The coefficient of thermal expansion of
(d) Under pining
cement concrete is
(a) 2 × 10-4 per oC (b) 3 × 10-4 per oC 93. The piece of brick cut with its one corner
equivalent to half the length and half the
(c) 3 × 10-6 per oC (d) 4 × 10-4 per oC
width of a full brick, is known as-
86. Nearest edge distance of a centre mem- (a) Queen closer (b) Bevelled closer
ber in rivet should not be less than-
(c) King closer (d) Half king closer
(a) 1.5 d (b) 1.6 d
94. If Height of the first storey of a building
(c) 1.4 d (d) 1.0 d
is 3.20 m and riser is 13 cm, the number
87. An RCC column is regarded as long col- of treads required, is-

[ 353 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

(a) 12 (b) 18 21. (b) 22. (b) 23. (a) 24. (c)
(c) 24 (d) 25 25. (c) 26. (a) 27. (d) 28. (d)
95. Couple roof is used for spans- 29. (c) 30. (a) 31. (c&d) 32. (c)
(a) 3.5 m or less 33. (b) 34. (b) 35. (a) 36. (a)
(b) 3.5 m but less than 5 m 37. (c) 38. (b) 39. (d) 40. (c)
(c) 5 m but less than 6.5 m 41. (b) 42. (b) 43. (d) 44. (b)
(d) 6.5 m but less than 8.0 m
45. (a) 46. (c) 47. (d) 48. (c)
96. In coping slopes provided for D.P.C. are
49. (d) 50. (a) 51. (a) 52. (b)
known-
53. (b) 54. (a) 55. (c) 56. (d)
(a) Weathering (b) Coping course
(c) Throating (d) None of the above 57. (c) 58. (d) 59. (b) 60. (c)
61. (a) 62. (c) 63. (d) 64. (d)
97. The place where two sloping roof meet to
top together, is called- 65. (c) 66. (c) 67. (c) 68. (d)
(a) Ridge cover (b) Ridge 69. (d) 70. (b) 71. () 72. (c)
(c) Ridge beam (d) All of the above 73. () 74. (b) 75. (b) 76. (a)
98. Damp problem is mostly produced in a- 77. (b) 78. (d) 79. (a) 80. (c)
(a) Stone masonry structure 81. (d) 82. (a) 83. (b) 84. (d)
(b) Brick masonry structure
85. (a) 86. (a) 87. (b) 88. (c)
(c) Both stone and brick masonry structures
89. (b) 90. (d) 91. (d) 92. (a)
(d) None of the above
93. (c) 94. (c) 95. (a) 96. (a)
99. A full brick or stone which is laid with its
97. (b) 98. (b) 99. (b) 100. (d)
length perpendicular to the face of the wall
is called- 1(c).
(a) King closer (b) Header Concrete classification (Based upon)
Cementing Bulk Grade of Perspective Place
(c) Stretcher (d) Facing material density cement specification of casting

Extra light Low In Situ

100. The highest central wedge shaped block Lime
concrete <500 kg/m3 strength
1:4:8
1:3:6
M7.5
M10 concrete
<20 N/mm2
of an arch is called- Gypsum Light 500- 1:2:4 M15 Precast
concrete
concrete 1800 kg/m3 Medium 1 : 1.5 : 3 M20
strength
(a) Haunch (b) Skew back Cement Dense weight 20-40 1:1:2 M25
concrete 1800-2500 2
N/mm
kg/m3.
(c) Spandril (d) Key-stone Super heavy High
weight > 2500 strength
2
CIVIL Ki GOLI Team (9255624029) kg/m
3 > 40 N/mm

ANSWER KEY 2( b).Super-elevation: Also called Cant/Banking.

It is the rising of the outer edge of the road wrt
1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (c)
inner edge in order to counteract the effect of
5. (d) 6. (a) 7. (c) 8. (d) centrifugal force is called Super elevation.

9. (c) 10. (b) 11. (b) 12. (c)

v2 tan   f
 , For < 4°
13. (c) 14. (b) 15. (a) 16. (a) gR 1  f tan 
17. (b) 18. (d) 19. (a) 20. (d)

[ 354 ]
 [ S. Sorout , Whatsapp - 9255624029 ]
1080 - 1962)
1 – f tan  1, tan  = e 2
os
N Pc q c  1  sin  
As per Rankine’s Formula: d =  
P   1  sin  

sin e
 P
sin s 
+ d = minimum depth of foundation
W W co
W

 = density of soil,  = Angle of repose of soil
1

qc = gross bearning capacity of soil

12(c). Consistency Test: It is the Amount of water
v 2 used to make paste of normal consistency. It is about
So e f 30% generally. It is the percentage of water required
gR
for the cement paste, the viscosity of which will be
3(a). For M20 - 30 litre, M15 - 32 litre, such that Vicat’s plunger penetrates upto 5 to 7 mm
from bottom (33 to 35 mm from top) of the Vicat’s
M10 - 34 litre mould.
4(c).
13(c). Alumina, (Al2O3) Responsible for quick setting, excess of it
lowers strength (No contribution in strength)
5(d). As per Unwin's formula d mm  6.01 t mm
Where tmm = minimum thickness of the plates being 14(b).
connected. The Asphalt flooring is made by mixing Molten
6(a).California bearing ratio (CBR) test: For evalu- mass of specific asphalt withe clan sharp gravel/
ating the stability of soil sub grade & base course
sand/grit in a specific ratio powdered on the con-
materials for flexible pavements.
crete floor in hot state with enough consistency
to be dropped freely & then trowelled keeping
Penetration
Plunger 5 cm uniform thickness of (13-25) mm.

15(a).

Sucharge weight S.No. Rubble Masonry Ashlar Masonry

1. Use hard & irregular Use smooth
Mould shape stone shape of of stone
Soil sample
(150 mm × 127 mm)
high 2. These type masonry These type masonry
having rough dressing having smooth
& having wide joint. dressing & regular
7(c). fine joints of 3 mm thick
8(d).
16(a). Delete or remove line by using Trim Com-
4 Radius (R) = K mand.
where,
R K = 2 for mild steel 17(b).
K = 4 HYSD
8 18(d).

Fig.: Standard 90º hook

d4
9(c). I
r  64  d
10(b). A d2 4
11(b).Depth of Foundation: Minimum 50 cm (IS 4

[ 355 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]
19(a). Lift: It is the average height through which the 22(b). Bends and Hooks: The length of the straight
earth has to be lifted from source to the place of portion of a bar beyond the end of the hook should be
spreading or heaping. atleast 4 times the diameter.
Lead: It is the average horizontal distance between 4 minimum should be provided
for effective use of hook
the centre of excavation to the centre of deposition.
16 Radiusr(R) = K where, K = 2 for mild steel
20(d). Characteristics of Contour K = 4 for HYSD
(a) A zero meter contour line represents the
Fig.: Standard hook
coastal line. When no value is represented, it
indicates a flat terrain.
(b) Equally spaced contours represents uniform
slope.
23(a).Minimum of
(c) A watershed or ridge line contour crosses the
valley contour at right angle. Generally the
contours are not visible on the grounds excepts 0.75 d  Vertical stirrups  , d  Inclined stirrups 
in the case of shore lines. 
(d) Two contours intersect each other only in case Sv
300 mm
of overhanging cliff or a cave penetrating a 
hill side. 24(c).

100.0 100.0
25(c). Hoffman’s kiln has a fixed chimney at the
centre around which the kiln is divided into 12 cham-
105.0
95.0 bers in a ring. Each chamber has a door communicat-
110.0 90.0
ing with the outside and a flue leading to the chimney
115.0 85.0 26(a). Soundness Test: To detect change in volume
Ridge
Line Valicy
Line
after setting
(a) (b)
Le  Chatelier method Auto clave test
(e) Direction of steepest slope is along the shortest Measure unsoundness (free lime only) Sensitive to both lime & magnesia
distance between the contours. 100 gm of cement + 0.78 P water Internal mould dimension (25 × 25 × 282) mm
Result is given in "mm" Result is given in %
21(b).
The maximum expansion limit for OPC, rapid
hardening, low heat, portland, masonry cement is 10
mm & for super sulphated, high alumina cement is 5
Eye-vane

mm.
27(d). Inclined single-stroke Gothic lettering is also
Fiducial edge

acceptable on SEABEE drawings, while it is not rec-

ommended for the beginner & should not be attempted
until you have mastered vertical lettering techniques.
Object vane

Inclined & vertical lettering should never appear on

the same drawing. The angle of inclination is 67 1/2
degrees from the horizontal.
Single Stroke Inclined Gothic Lettering
These are single stroke letter inclined at 75 degree to
Alidade the Horizontal.
Alidade: It is used for sighting the objects & drawing 28(d). Various physical properties of structural steel
the lines.Plane Alidade for horizontal & telescopic are given below.
Alidade for inclined line of sight.
Unit mass of steel,  = 7850 kg/m3
Modulus of elasticity, E = 2 × 105 N/mm2

[ 356 ]
 [ S. Sorout , Whatsapp - 9255624029 ]
modulus of rigidity, G = 0.769 × 105 N/mm2 Efficiency of joint
Poisson ratio,  = 0.3

m in im um R v , S trength of p late 
Coefficient of thermal expansion,  = 12 × 10–6/ n=
Strength of solid plate
ºC
33(b).
29(c). Instrument Use
 Hand Level  To trace contours. 34(b).
 Abney Level  To measure slope, take cross section, to find gradient.
 Box Sextant To measure horizontal & vertical angle in chain survey
and plane table survey Revenue Gunter’s chain Engineer’s Metric chain
 Indian Pattern Clino-Meter  To determine elevation difference between chain (surveyor chain) chain 100 ft long
two points. 33 ft 66 ft (100 links)
(16 link) (100 link) 30 m 20 m
 The Pantagraph  Used to reduce or enlarge the maps.
(150 links) (100 links)
 Optical square/Cross Staff  To set out 90° angle.
 Planimeter  Instrument used to measure area very accurately.
35(a).
 Ceylon Ghat Tracer.  To measure slope & to set-out gradient.
 Clinometer  Angle measuring Instrument 36(a).
 Cardiograph  Improved version of pantagraph.
Property 1st class
2 Compressive  10.5
LS
30(a). Shift ‘s’ = strength (N/mm 2 )
24R Water Absorption 20%
When a transition curve is introduced between Appearance Smooth surface,
rectangular in shape
straight & circular curve, then the circular curve has with parallel, sharp &
to be shifted inwards so that transition curve meets straight edges with
the circular curve tangentially. square corners.
Making process Table moulded &
31(c &d). Camber or cross fall: It is the rising of burnt in kiln
the middle of the road surface in the transverse direc- Uses Pointing & Important
tion to drain off rain water from road surface. work
 The cross slope for shoulder should be 0.5% 37(c).
steeper than cross slope of Adjoining pavement,
subject to a minimum of 3%. S.No Type of Construction Min. Grade
 Camber is measured in 1 in n or n% 1. Lean Concrete bases M5, M 7.5
 For cement concrete pavement, Camber is
straight line otherwise parabolic. 2. Plain Concrete Cement M 15
Type of surface Range of camber
3. RCC (general construction) M 20
in areas of rainfall range 4. Water tanks, dome M 30
Heavy to Light 5. In sea water M30(RCC)
1. Cement concrete and high 1 in 50 (2.0%) - 1 in 60 (1.7%) M20 (PCC)
type bituminous surface
6. Post-tensioned PSC M 30
2. Thin bituminous surface 1 in 40 (2.5%) - 1 in 50 (2.0%)
3. Water bound macadam 1 in 33 (3.0%) - 1 in 40 (2.5%) 7. Pre - tensioned PSC M40
and gravel pavement
38(b).
4. Earthen 1in 25(4.0%) - 1 in 33(3.0%)
39(d).
32(c).Strength of Plate: It is the minimum strength
of plate in shearing & tearing . The shearing failure 40(c).
can be prevented by providing sufficient edge distance Number Equation
Fi VL
Tearing strength: Pt  (B  nd)tat Reynolds No. 
Fv 
n = No. of holes
at = Allowable tensile strength of plate.

[ 357 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

Fi V  Calcium chloride Silicate Dose 0.1-0.2% by weight of cement.


Eulers No. Fp p 48(c). Bearing capacity of rocks are as follows:
 Igneous rocks > Metamorphic rock > Sedimen-
tary rock.
Fi V
Mach No.  49(d). Solvents: These are oils used to thin the paints,
Fe C increase the spread. Also called thinner. Ex. Naptha,
Spirit, Petroleum, Turpentine oil.
Fi V
Froude No.  Terpentine oil are also used to clean brushes & other
Fg gL
tools.
Fi v 50(a). Bogue’s Compound
Weber No. 
F  / L When these raw materials are put in kiln. Then it fuses
41(b).Floor area: & following four major Compounds are formed:-
F.A. = Plinth area – area occupied by walls/In- Principal Mineral Compound Formula Avg. Symbol Function
termediate supports Tri calcium Silicate 3CaO.SiO2 C3S 40% 7-day strength & Hardness
(Alite) best cementing material
Area of all floor (Resistance to freezing,
F.A. ratio = Area of total plot 100 Dicalcium silicate (Belite) 2CaO.SiO2 C2S
thawing)
32% Ultimate strength (1 year
strength) (Resistance to
 Area of Balcony included upto 50% in the floor chemical attack)
Tricalcium Aluminate 3CaO.Al2O 3 C3 A 10% Flash–set, initial setting
area. (Celite)
 The plinth area as compared to floor area is Tetra calcium Alumina 4CaO.Al2O3. C4AF 8% Poorest cementing value

more than 30% to 40% Ferrite (Felite) Fe2O 3

42(b). 51(a). True bearing of a line (also known as Azi-

43(d). muth) does not change with time & can be re-estab-
lished even after hundreds of years.
44(b). Portland cement: Classified on the basis of
manufacturing as 33 grade, 43 grade & 53 grade. 52(b ). Factors Affecting shrinkage
OPC : - It has 63% Lime, 22% Silica and 15% Other (a) Water-cement Ratio: It increase with the in-
Materials. crease in water cement ratio
(i) OPC-33 (IS : 269-2015) (b) Relative Humidity: It decreases with increase
(ii) OPC-43 (IS : 8112-1989) in the relative humidity. There will be no shrink-
(iii) OPC-53 (IS : 12269-1987) age if relative humidity is 100%
(IST) – 30 minute & (FST) – 600 minute (c) Type of aggregates: Aggregates with mois-
ture movement & low elastic modulus cause
45(a). Bench Marks (B.M.): Any point whose el-
large shrinkage
evation is definitely known can be used as bench mark.
 The rate of shrinkage generally decrease with
Following are the various types of Benchmark - the increase in the size of aggregates.
 (a) GTS (great trignometrical survey) benchmark (d) Admixtures: The shrinkage increases with the
is taken wrt Bombay Port with 1 degree latitude addition of accelerating admixtures due to the
& 1 degree longitude presence of (CaCl2) in it.
 (b) Temporary BM - It is established temporary (e) Time: The rate of shrinkage rapidly decreases
for a day’s work. with time but shrinkage strain increases with
 (c) Permanent BM - It is established by P.W..D. time.
or S.O.I. (survey of India).  It is observed that 14-34% of the 20 years
 (d) Arbitrary BM - Arbitrary considered for lev- shrinkage occurs in 2 weeks, 40-80% shrink-
elling small area. age occurs in 3 months & the remaning 66-
46(c). 85% shrinkage occurs in one year
(f) Strength of concrete: High strength concrete
47(d). Accelerators Rapid setting & high early strength
have less shrinkage as compared to low strength

[ 358 ]
 [ S. Sorout , Whatsapp - 9255624029 ]
concrete.
E E 9KG
(g) Method of curing: It does depends upon the G K E
method of curing adopted. Different method of 2 1    3 1  2  3K  G
curing have different rate of shrinkage.
3K  2G
53(b). 
6K  2G
54(a).
61(a). Sawing of Timber
IP Consistency
0 Non Plastic
Saw cuts
Saw cuts
<7 Low Plastic
7–17 Medium Plastic
> 17 Highly plastic
55(c). Accelerators Rapid setting & high early strength ORDINARY SAWING QUARTER SAWING TANGENTIAL SAWING

 Calcium chloride Silicate Dose 0.1-0.2% by weight of cement.

56(d). Factors affecting workability Saw cuts

Factor Effect on Workability

Water content As water content (Direct relationship) increases, fluidity
of mix increases so workability increases
Aggregate size  Higher the aggregate size, (direct relationship)
higher the workability RADIAL SAWING
 Big size aggregate, surface area to be wetted is less,
paste required forlubricating the surface will be less. Ordinary Flat/slab sawing: It is very quick &
Shape of aggregate  Angular & flaky aggregate have large surface
area hence are less workable.
Economical method. It is widely adopted in our country.
 Rounded cubical shape aggregates have less surface Radial Sawing Sawing is done Parallel to the
area. So less amount of paste is required for lubrica
tion. Hence they they are more workable.
rays & perpendicular to the rings. It give strongest
Aggregate/cement  Higher the ratio, leaner will be the concrete. timber
 Lean concrete means concrete having less paste
available for lubrication of per unit surface area of
Tangential SawingCutting is tangential to the
aggregate. Annual rings & at right angles to the meduallary rays.
Surface texture Smoother the surface, higher the workability It is unsuitable for flooring.
Grading of aggregates  Well graded aggregates are more workable
 Such mix will have least voids. So excess cement paste
Quarter/Rift Sawing These wood wears better
will be available as lubricants.
& shrink more evenly.

57(c). Note: Radial sawing will produce the strongest

timber piece as in radial sawing, medulary rays are
Minimum Specified Strength in N/mm 2
not out as the sawing is done parallel to the rays.
Type/days 1 day 3days 7 days 28 days
OPC (33 grade) – 16.0 22.0 33.0 62(c). Dimension Test (IS 1077): 20 bricks are
Portland Pozzolana – 16.0 22.0 33.0
randomly selected of standard size (19 × 9 × 9 ) cm.
Low heat Portland – 10.0 16.0 35.0
63(d). Terms Used in Large Survey Area
58(d).
59(b). Size of theodolite is defined by lower gradu-
ated circle.
 Non-transit theodolite can not be rotated through
180o in vertical plane.
60(c).
Relationship between Elastic Constants

[ 359 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]
B  Gypsum retards setting time of cement
 Gypsum is usually mixed with clinker at the time
Tie
e of final grinding
i h · Excess gypusm makes cement unsound. So Gyp-
1
Tie
6
2 sum added to clinker should not be greater than
7 3
C 8 2.5-3%
9 j D
4 69(d).Dimension of Regular Sheets
k

f
g Designation Dimensions (mm)
A0 841 1189
A1 594  841
A2 420  594
A
A3 297  420
(i) Main station : It is a point in chain survey where A4 210  297
two sides of triangle meet. In above figure, A, A5 149  210
B, C, D are main stations.
(ii) Base line: It is the longest survey line from which
70(b).
direction of all other sruvey lines are fixed. In
above figure, AB is the base line. 71( ).
(iii) Main survey line: Chain line joining two main 72(c).
survey stations. In above figure, AD, DB, BC,
CA, BA are main survey lines. Change in length M 0 L0 T 0
(vi) Tie station or subsidiary station: Station on sur- Strain = Actual length = [Dimensionless]
vey line joining main stations. It is helpful for
locating interior details. In above figure, e, f, g, 73().
h, i are the tie stations. 74(b).
(v) Proof line or check line: It is provided to check
the accuracy of the field work. In above figure, Work % of Estimate
Ck & Dj are check lines. Departmental charges (centage charge) (10 – 15)
64(d). Lime Stabilization Contractor charge 10
(i) Normal requirement is 4% to 6% of the soil Labour Charge 25
weight. Electrification 8
(ii) Highly unstable, plastic and swelling clayey soils Electric fan 4
such as 'black cotton soils' may be stabilized by Sanitary and Water Supply Charge 8
hydrated lime. Contigences Charges (3 – 5)
Work Charge Establishment (1.5 – 2)
65(c). Tricalcium Aluminate 3CaO.Al O C A 10% 2 3 3
Tools and Plants (1 - 1.5)
for Flash–set, initial setting time
75(b).
66(c). On superelevated curves, the rolling should
begin at the low side and progress towards a high side. 76(a). Reduced Bearing: When WCB is more than
 Rolling should begin from the outer edge of the 90º, it is reduced to the corresponding angle less than
placed material and gradually progress towards 90º
the centre.·
WCB R B Quadrant
67(c).
0º–90º WCB NE
68(d). Gypsum is added to cement to reduce flash 90º–180º 180–WCB SE
setting. 180º–270º WCB–180 SW
 After flash set, mixing is not allowed because no 270º–360º 360–WCB NW
gain in strength development after mixing.

[ 360 ]
 [ S. Sorout , Whatsapp - 9255624029 ]
Simple supported beam
Hence, N44 30’W = 315 30’ 0 0

77(b). Change Point: where back sight & fore sight Fixed end beam
is taken.
First reading made on a point of known reduced 82(a).
level is always a Back sight reading.
83(b & d).The general expression for the proportions
78(d). Least count of Prismatic Compass is 30', sur- of cement, sand and coarse aggregate is 1 : 1 : 2 & 1
veyor compass 15', vernier scale - 0.1mm, microme- : 1.2 : 2.4 for very high strength, 1 : 1.5 : 3 & 1 : 2 : 4
ter - 0.01 mm, theodolite (20'' & 15 second), for level- for normal works, 1 : 3 : 6 & 1 : 4 : 8 for foundations
ling staff - 5 mm. and mass concrete works.
79(a). Abutments: 84(d). As the carbon content in steel increases, the
Brittleness property of steel increases (steel becomes
– end support of a bridge.
less ductile). Hence, cast iron (having higher carbon
– Retain earth filling and transmit the reaction of
content) is less ductile than mild steel (having low car-
super-structure.
bon content).
 As compared to mild steel, cast Iron has High
Water way compressive strength & low tensile strength.
Parapet or Crash Barrier

ac
h Bridge Deck 85( a).
p ro
l1
Ap Bearing l2 l3
free
board 86(a). Minimum edge & end distance
HFL Pier

Abutment BED LEVEL

(a) Machine cut = 1.5 × hole dia
Array
Pile cap Scour depth Abutment (b) Sheared or hand plane cut edges (Rough) =
Wall Pile 1.7 × hole dia
87(b).

80(c).

Type of Channel Discharge Free Board Column

cm3/sec cm Pedestal
Main & Branch Canal > 10 0.75 Footing
Branch Canal Major 5-10 0.6
Distributaries Slenderness   ratio =
Major Distributaries 1-5 0.5 Effective length
Minor Distributaries <1 0.3 Least lateral dimension
Water Courses <0.06 0.1-0.15  < 12 Short column, fails under ultimate loads
by crushing
81(d). Types of Beam   12 Long column, fails due to large lateral
deflection under relatively low
Free cantilever beam compressive loads.

Single overhanging beam

Propped cantilever beam

Double overhanging beam

[ 361 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]
88(c). Factor of safety: The ratio of ultimate strength the crown and skew back.
of a material to working strength (or permissible
10. Centre or striking point: It is the geometrical
stress).
centre point from where the arch forming the extrados,
Strength of material arch rings & intrados are described or struck.
(a) F.O.S. =
Permissible stress 11. Span: It is the clear horizontal distance between
the supports.
Yield stress
(b) F.O.S. = 12. Depth or height: It is the perpendicular distance
Working stress between the intrados and extrados.
 Factor of safety for concrete is taken as 1.5 while 13. Rise: It is the clear vertical distance between the
the value for steel is taken as 1.15 . highest point on the intrados and the springing line.
 Steel is manufactured in the factories under qual- 14. Impost: It is the projecting course at the upper
ity control. So, factor of safety is taken lesser part of a pier or abutment to stress the springing line.
than that of concrete which is produced in field 15. Thickness (or breadth of soffit): This is the
in not that much controlled way. horizontal distance, measured perpendicular to the front
89(b). and back faces of an arch.
90(d). A cavity wall (Hollow wall) is constructed to
resist heat flow & is designed to carry axial & bend-
ing stress. General size (4-10) cm.
91(d).
V
92(a). Shoring: Shoring is the construction of tem-
porary structure to support temporarily an unsafe
structure these render lateral support to walls and are
used under the following circumstances :
(a) When wall cracks due to unequal settlement
of foundation
(b) When adjacent structure is to be dismantled
(c) When a wall shows signs of bulging out
1. Intrados: This is the inner curve of an arch. (d) When opening are to be made or enlarged in
the wall
2. Extrados: It is the outer curve of an arch. Shores may be of following type:
3. Crown: It is the highest part of extrados. (a) Flying Shores: It is also called horizontal shor-
ing. These are used to give horizontal support to
4. Soffit: It is the inner surface of an arch. Some- two adjacent parallel party wall which have be-
times, intrados and soffit are used synonymously. come unsafe due to removal or collapse of the
5. Voussoirs: These are wedge-shaped units of intermediate building.
masonry, forming an arch. (b) Raking shores: In this method inclined mem-
bers rackers are used to give lateral support to
6. Spandril: This is a curved-triangular space formed the wall rackers should be inclined to the ground
between the extrados & the horizontal line through by 45o to make them more effective
the crown. (c) Dead or vertical shores: It consist of vertical
7. Springer: It is the first voussoir at springing level; member known as dead shores.
it is immediately adjacent the skewback.  It is used for supporting temporarily wall for
rebuilding etc.
8. Springs points: These are the points from which  The process of placing a New foundation under
the curve of the arch springs. an existing one/strengthening an existing
9. Haunch: It is the lower half of the arch between foundation is called underpinning of foundations.

[ 362 ]
 [ S. Sorout , Whatsapp - 9255624029 ]
 Cost of formwork/shuttering may be upto (20 – 99(b).
25)% of the cost of structure in the building
100(d). Key is sometimes made prominent by mak-
work.
ing out of a larger section and projecting it below and
 Trestle scaffolding is used for painting & repair above the outlines of an arch.
work inside the room up to a height of 15 meters
93(c).

CIVIL Ki GOLI Team (9255624029)

(a) Bevelled (b) Queen-closer (c) Queen-closer

closer (half) (quarter)

(d) King closer (e) Full (f) Mitred

brick closer

(g) Half bat (h) Three quarter (i) Bevelled

bat bat

320
94(c). No. of riser   25
13
Tread = 25 - 1 = 24
95(a).Coupled Closed Roof :- This roof is similar to
couple roof except that the legs of common rafter is
connected by a tie, preventing the spread out & over-
turning of walls. It is adopted economically upto a
span of 4.2 m.
96(a).
97(b).The ridge is the peak where two sloped roof
sections meet.It is the highest point of a pitched roof
that receives the head of the spars (also called rafters
or common rafters).
98(b).Dampness spread from the ground upwards.
In addition to this, dampness can also spread from
roof downwards due to rain water

[ 363 ]
 [ S. Sorout , Whatsapp - 9255624029 ]

PSSSB JUNIOR DRAFTSMAN Paper

1.The wedge shaped bricks or blocks forming (c) Top (d) Back
an arch are called _______
11.The under surface of arch is called _______
(a) Arch ring (b) Extrados
(a) Back (b) Soffit
(c) Voussoirs (d) None of these
(c) Springer (d) Spandril
2.A special course provided at the exposed top
of a wall to prevent rain water from enter- 12.Compiler is a _______
ing the wall is called _______ (a) Input device (b) Output device
(a) Spalls (b) Throating (c) Software (d) Hardware
(c) Corbel (d) Coping 13.The vertical window provided in the pitched
3.The middle horizontal member of the frame- roof is called _______
work of a shutter where sliding bolt for (a) Bay window (b) Corner window
providing lock is fixed is called _______. (c) Dormer window (d) None of these
(a) Styles (b) Reveals 14.The local swelling of a finished plastered sur-
(c) Horns (d) Lock rail face is known as _______
4.The end support of bridge is called _______. (a) Floating (b) Peeling
(a) Pier(b) Pillar (c) Blistering (d) Cracking
(c) Abutment (d) Approach road 15.Unit of measurement for centring and shut-
5.The art of providing an outward slope of 1 in tering form work is _______
20 to the tread of wheels of rolling stock is (a) Per m (b) Per sq m
known as _______. (c) Per cu. m (d) None of these
(a) Conning of wheel (b) Slope of wheel 16.In first Angle projection Top view is drawn
(c) Edging of wheel (d) Tilting of wheel (a) On XY Line
6.________ joint is used to connect a wooden (b) Below XY line
pieces at a desired angle. (c) Above XY Line
(a) Widening joint (b) Box joint (d) Inclined the XY line.
(c) Framing joint (d) Circular joint 17.The recommended method of projection ac-
7.Who invented flat footed rail _______ cording to BIS is _______
(a) Thomas (b) Vignole (a) First angle projection
(c) Einstein (d) None of these (b) Third angle projection
8.A road running through length and breadth of (c) Second angle projection
country and joining important cities of a (d) Fourth angle projection
country is called _______ 18.The stepped masonry projection which in-
(a) State highway (b) National highway tended to provide lateral strength to a wall
(c) Express way (d) None of these is _______
9._______ DOS command is used to restore file (a) Grouting (b) Buttresses
copied by back up command. (c) Drip stone (d) Block in course
(a) RESTORE (b) BACKUP 19.The least count of prismatic compass is
(c) CHKDSK (d) DISKCOPY _______ minutes
10.The artificial light on the drawing board should (a) 15 (b) 30
be differed from the _______ (c) 60 (d) 12
(a) Right (b) Left 20.The plates which are used at rail joint to main-
tain continuity of rails in a track are called

[ 407 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]
_______ 31._______ DOS command is used to rename
(a) Fish plates (b) Welded plates an old file name with new file name.
(c) Spikes (d) Rails (a) REN (b) NAME
21.The tapes used for highest precision work are (c) SAVE AS (d) ALTNAM
_______ 32._______ is used for cutting internal or exter-
(a) Linen tape (b) Metallic tape nal curves on thin stocks.
(c) Steel tape (d) Invar tape (a) Jig saw (b) Band saw
22.The thin wooded member provided in be- (c) Radial saw (d) Circular saw
tween the rails and styles of shutter are 33.The Graphic Representation of an Object is
called _______. called
(a) Rebate (b) Panels (a) Orthographic (b) Projection
(c) Chocks (d) None of these (c) Drawing (d) Convention
23.The size of a Trimmed drawing A-4 is 34.The first reading taken after setting up of
(a) (210×297) mm (b) 206×219 dumpy level is _______
(c) 330×450 (d) 165×240 (a) BS (b) IS
24.To facilitate extension entries in the table (c) FS (d) CP
should begin from _______ 35.The window provided in the flat roof of a room
(a) Bottom to top (b) Top to bottom in which natural light from ordinary win-
(c) Horizontal (d) Inclined dow cannot be achieved is called ______
(a) Skylight window
25.The layer of liquid material deposited outside
the sapwood is called _______ (b) Lantern window
(a) Bark layer (b) Sap wood layer (c) Clerestorey window
(c) Cambium layer (d) Inner dark layer (d) None of these

26.In stair case wiring _______ way switches are 36.Radial line method is a _______ method of
used. contouring
(a) One way (b) Three way (a) Indirect (b) Direct
(b) Alternative switch (d) Two way switch (c) Square method (d) None of these

27.The step of non uniform width is known as 37.The switches are made up of _______
_______ (a) PVC (b) Bakelite
(a) Nosing (b) String (c) Plastic (d) None of these
(c) Flier (d) None of these 38._______ is used to fix rails, bearing plate or
28.Stability of gravity dam mainly depends upon chair to wooden sleepers.
its _______ (a) Bolt(b) Chair
(a) Weight (b) Height (c) Keys (d) Spikes
(c) Width (d) Shape 39.The culvert has a span usually less than
29.The member which support the covering _______
material of a sloping roof are called (a) 4m (b) 10m
_______ (c) 9m (d) 6m
(a) Rafters (b) Purlins 40.No of links in a 20 m metric chain is ______.
(c) Cleats (d) Eaves (a) 120 (b) 110
30.The final treatment to cement or lime mortar (c) 80 (d) 100
made to the joints of the masonry to pro- 41.A scale representing three units is called
vide neat appearance is called ______ (a) Plain scale (b) Diagonal scale
(a) Finishing (b) Throating (c) Isomeric scale (d) Liner scale
(c) Pointing (d) Plastering
42.The full size scale is written as

[ 408 ]
 [ S. Sorout , Whatsapp - 9255624029 ]
(a) 1:2 (b) 1:1 or varnish is _______
(c) 2:1 (d) 4:1 (a) Per m (b) Per sq m
43.The width of stair should not be less than (c) Per cu. m (d) None of these
_______ 53.A half turn stair with no space between its
(a) 3 m (b) 4m flights is known as _______
(c) 1 m (d) 2m (a) Open well stairs (b) Quarter turn stairs
44.A line joining points of equal elevation is (c) Dog legged stairs (d) None of these
known as _______ 54.The process of cutting the river bed due to
(a) Level line (b) Equal depth line action of water is called _______
(c) Elevation line (d) None of these (a) Afflux depth (b) Cutting depth
45._______ is a combination of king and queen (c) Scour depth (d) None of these
post roof truss. 55.In M 20 mix 20 indicates _______
(a) Mansard roof truss (a) Compressive strength
(b) Double purlin roof truss (b) Mix proportion
(c) Steel roof truss (c) Tensile strength
(d) None of these (d) None of these
46.The foundation consisting of a thick RCC slab 56.For Rough work witch grade pencil is used
covering the whole area in the form of a (a) H (b) HB
mat is called _______ (c) 2H (d) 2B
(a) Spread footing (b) Deep footing
57._______ is used for planning across the grains
(c) Raft foundation (d) Caisson foundation
particularly the ends of board.
47.Fall of moisture form atmosphere to the earth (a) Jack plane (b) Fore plane
surface in any form is called _______ (c) Block plane (d) Jointer plane
(a) Evaporation (b) Transpiration
58.The end of the sloping roof finished in a ver-
(c) Precipitation (d) None of these
tical triangle is called _______
48.The preparation of successful drawing de- (a) Gable (b) Pitch
pends upon the _______ (c) Ridge (d) None of these
(a) Layout (b) Zones
59._______ chisel used for taking heavy and
(c) Quadrants (d) Division
deep cuts resulting in more stock removal.
49.Front view of an object is shown in plane (a) Firmer (b) Mortise
(a) H.P(b) V.P. (c) Socket (d) Gauge
(c) Both the plane (d) None of them
60.The bed of canal is lowered in case of _____
50For rivet diameter upto 25 mm, the diameter (a) Aqueduct (b) Super passage
of rivet hole is larger than the diameter of (c) Canal syphon (d) Syphon aqueduct
rivet by_______.
61.The paste prepared by mixing cement with
(a) 1 mm (b) 1.5 mm
lime mortar in suitable proportions is called
(c) 2 mm (d) 2.5 mm
_______.
51.The materials which cannot resist transverse (a) Light weight mortar
stresses and are liable to crack when sub- (b) Fire resistant mortar
jected to severe loading are known as
(c) Gauged mortar
_______
(d) Black mortar
(a) Flexible materials
(b) Rigid materials 62.When the drain is over the canal the struc-
ture provided is known as _______.
(c) Compression materials
(d) Tensile materials (a) Aqueduct (b) Super passage
(c) Canal syphon (d) Syphon aqueduct
52.Unit of measurement for removing of paint

[ 409 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]
63.The art of bringing the floor to a true and level 73.A temporary structure constructed to prevent
surface by means of screeds is called the water from entering an area where a
_______ permanent structure is to be constructed
(a) Floor finishes (b) Screeding is called _______.
(c) Topping (d) All of above (a) Coffer dam (b) Support dam
64.The doors are used where there is constant (c) Temporary bridge (d) None of these
foot traffic of people coming in and going 74.The shortest distance from a point to a plane
out of entrance of public buildings are called is seen in _______ view.
_______ (a) Front (b) Top
(a) Collapsible door (b) Panelled door (c) Edge (d) None of these
(c) Glazed door (d) Revolving door 75.When some additions are done in the origi-
65.Planimeter is used for _______ nal work, a fresh detailed estimate is pre-
(a) To reduce area of map pared is called
(b) To increase area of map (a) Revised estimate
(c) To calculate area of map (b) Extension estimate
(d) None of these (c) Supplementary estimate
66.Inclined Gothic Lettering is drawn at an Angle (d) All of these
of 76.In AUTOCAD _______ command is used to
(a) 65° (b) 75° create an object at specified distance from
(c) 85° (d) 120° an existing object.
(a) OFFSET (b) TRIM
67._______ command is used in AutoCAD to
create 3D solid or surface (c) DISTANCE (d) None of these
(a) REN (b) SOLID 77.A roof having slope in four directions is called
(c) SURFACE (d) EXTRUDE _______
(a) Gable roof (b) Shed roof
68.The use of Alidade in plane table survey is
_______ (c) Mansard roof (d) Hipped roof
(a) Centring 78.In second quadrant front view and top view is
(b) Orientation _______
(c) Focussing (a) On VP (b) Overlap
(d) To provide line of sight (c) On HP (d) None of these
69.The special treatment provided to plastered 79.The horizontal distance between two consecu-
walls at their lower level, usually in draw- tive contours is called _______
ing and living rooms is called _______ (a) Contour interval
(a) Polishing (b) Knotting (b) Horizontal equivalent
(c) Erazing (d) Skirting (c) Contour gap
70.Creep is _______ movement of rails (d) None of these
(a) Vertical (b) Down side 80.The line joining places of equal declination
(c) Up side (d) Horizontal are known as _______
(a) Iso bar (b) Contour
71.The first watering before sowing the crop is
known as _______ (c) Isogonics lines (d) None of these
(a) Kor watering (b) Paleo 81.The mortar joints are filled flush with the face
(c) Delta (d) None of these of the wall is called _______ pointing
(a) Tuck (b) Struck
72.A solid having four equal equilateral triangu-
lar faces is called _______ (c) Flat (d) Recessed
(a) Cube (b) Pyramid 82.The width of broad gauge track is ____ m.
(c) Tetrahedron (d) Pentagon pyramid (a) 1.766 (b) 1.676

[ 410 ]
 [ S. Sorout , Whatsapp - 9255624029 ]
(c) 1.862 (d) 1.792 (b) Fire resistant mortar
83._______ is called a decorative type plaster (c) Gauged mortar
which provides an excellent finish like that (d) Black mortar
with marble lining. 94.Horizontal and vertical planes intersect each
(a) Stucco plasters (b) Moghul plaster other at.
(c) Lime plaster (d) None of these (a) 120° (b) 90°
84.King post truss is used for spans of _______ (c) 110° (d) 105°
(a) 16-20 m (b) 10-15 m 95.The size of Arrow head should be proportion-
(c) 6-9 m (d) 09- 17 m ate
85.Thickness of cement plaster is kept _____ (a) 1:3 (b) 2:1
for providing a vertical DPC (c) 3:1 (d) 1:1
(a) 20 mm (b) 10 mm 96.The maximum number of steps in a flight
(c) 40 mm (d) 5 mm should not be more than _______
86.In Terrazzo floors, the layer in between the (a) 12 (b) 15
base and tapping is called as _______ (c) 20 (d) None of these
(a) Under layer (b) Sub grade layer 97.Queen post truss is use for spans of _____.
(c) Floor finish (d) None of these (a) 16-20 m (b) 10-15 m
87._______ joints are used at corners of the pic- (c) 6-9 m (d) 09-13-5 m
ture frames. 98.The symbol φ (PHI) should be written before
(a) Mitre joint (b) Mortise joint a dimension
(c) Grooved joint (d) None of these (a) Radius (b) Diameter
88.The longest of the chain lines used in making (c) Size(d) Bore
a survey is _______ 99.In ideal triangle all angles are ________
(a) Base line (b) Check line (a) Equal (b) Less than 30°
(c) Tie line (d) None of these (c) More than 60° (d) None of these
89.Chisel pencil is used for drawing _______ 100.Bitumen road is best example for _______
(a) Straight line (b) Curved line pavement.
(c) Free hand line (d) None of these (a) Rigid (b) Semi rigid
90.Guide lines should be drawn very (c) Flexible (d) All of above
(a) Light (b) Thick 1. (c) 2. (d) 3. (d) 4. (c)
(c) Medium (d) Hidden
5. (a) 6. (b) 7. (b) 8. (b)
91.The total depth of water required by a crop
during the entire period the crop is in field 9. (a) 10. (a) 11. (b) 12. (c)
is called _______
13. (c) 14. (c) 15. (b) 16. (a)
(a) Delta (b) Duty
(c) Base period (d) Crop period 17. (b) 18. (b) 19. (b) 20. (a)
92.The vertical member provided in between the 21. (d) 22. (b) 23. (a) 24. (a)
steps and the hand rail are called _____
25. (c) 26. (d) 27. (d) 28. (a)
(a) Rise (b) Flight
(c) Soffit (d) Balusters 29. (a) 30. (c) 31. (a) 32. (b)
93.The paste prepared by mixing aluminous ce- 33. (c) 34. (a) 35. (b) 36. (a)
ment and finely crushed fire bricks in suit-
able proportions in addition to water is 37. (b) 38. (d) 39. (d) 40. (d)
called _______. 41. (b) 42. (b) 43. (c) 44. (d)
(a) Light weight mortar
45. (a) 46. (c) 47. (c) 48. (a)

[ 411 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]
49. (b) 50. (b) 51. (b) 52. (b) Corbel: A corbel is a projecting stone which is usually
provided to serve as support for roof truss, beam, weather sheds.
53. (c) 54. (d) 55. (d) 56. (b) Cornice: A cornice is a course of stone provided at the top of
wall. It is weathered and throated to dispose off rain water.
57. (a) 58. (a) 59. (b) 60. (c) Coping: A coping is a coarse of stone which laid at the top
wall so as to protect the wall from rain water.
61. (c) 62. (b) 63. (c) 64. (d)
Throating:-It is a groove provided on underside of teh pro-
65. (c) 66. (b) 67. (d) 68. (d) jecting elements such as sills, coping, cornices etc. so that rain
water can be discharged clear off the wall surface.
69. (c) 70. (d) 71. (b) 72. (c)
3. (d)
73. (a) 74. (a) 75. (a) 76. (a)
77. (d) 78. (c) 79. (b) 80. (c)
Head
81. (a) 82. (b) 83. (a) 84. (c)
Transome light Horn
85. (c) 86. (c) 87. (a) 88. (a)
Transome
89. (a) 90. (a) 91. (a) 92. (d)
Holdfast
93. (b) 94. (b) 95. (a) 96. (a) Penal Panel

Frame

Frame
97. (b) 98. (b) 99. (a) 100. (c)

Style

Style
Rail
CIVIL Ki GOLI Team (9255624029)
Panel Panel
1. (c)

Sill

WINDOW

Reveal- It is the external jamb of a door or window

opening at right angles door or to the wall face.
Style- It is the vertical outside members of the shutter
of a door or window.
Lock rail- It is the middle horizontal member of a
door shutter, to which locking arrangement is fixed.
Extrados: It is the outer curve of an arch. 4. (c) Abutments:
Voussoirs: These are wedge-shaped units of masonry, – end support of a bridge.
forming an arch. – Retain earth filling and transmit the reaction of
super-structure.
2. (d)
Weathering
Joist Parapet wall
Weathering
Water way
Parapet or Crash Barrier

Wall Cornice pr
o ac
h
l1
Bridge Deck

Ap Bearing l2 l3
plate free
board

Throating
HFL Pier
Throating
Abutment BED LEVEL

Wall Array
Pile cap Scour depth Abutment

Wall
Wall Pile

Corbel Cornice Coping 5. (a) Coning of wheels: Wheels of the

[ 412 ]
 [ S. Sorout , Whatsapp - 9255624029 ]
train are made at a slope of 1:20. Which is known the appearance of the building.
as conning of wheels. It reduces the wear & 14. (c) Defects in Painting
Tear of wheel flanges & also prevent the wheels
(a) Blistering: It is the defect caused due to the
from slipping.
fomation of bubbles under film of water paint.
Adzing of sleepers: Also called tilting of rails. The bubbles are formed by water vapours
For effective use of coning of wheels, the rails are trapped behind the painted surface.
also laid at the slope of 1 in 20 on the sleepers. (b) Running: This defect occur when the surface
1:20 to be painted is too smooth due to this the paint
runs back & leaves small area of the surface
20
Axis
Wheel uncovered.
(c) Craling or sagging: This defect occurs due to
the application of too thick paint.
Rail (d) Bloom: In this defect dull patches are formed
Adzing of sleeper
1 on finished polished surface. This may be either
20 Sleeper due to defect in paints or due to bad ventilation.
(e) Fading: This is the gradual loss of color of paints
due to effect of sunlight on pigments of paints.
7. (b) The rail sections having their foot rolled (f) Flashing: It is the formation of glossy patches
to flat are called flat-footed or Vignoles rails. This on the painted surface resulting from bad work-
type of rail was invented by Charles Vignoles in manship cheap paint or weather action.
1836. (g) Flaking: Flaking is the dislocation or lossening
of some portion of the painted surface resulting
8. (b) National highways are the main roads from a poor adhesion.
that connect all major cities to the capital of the (h) Grinning: This defect is caused when the sur-
country. They run throughout the length and face final coat does not have sufficient opacity
breadth of the country. so that background is clearly seen.
(i) Saponification: This is the formation of soap
11. (b) Soffit: It is the inner surface of an arch.
patches on the painted surface due to chemical
Sometimes, intrados and soffit are used synony-
action of alkalis.
mously.
16. (a) 1st angle projection
12. (c) Compiler is a software which converts
a program written in high level language (Source 1. Here the object is placed above the HP and
Language) to low level language (Object/Target/ infront of VP
Machine Language).
2. Here the object is in between the observer and
13. (c) plane of projection (POP)
Main
sloping
3. Here, POP is assumed to be non transparent.
roof

Dormer
window 4. This method is adopted in India and almost all
the countries except USA.
G
ab
le
an
d
17. (b) 3rd Angle projection
Gable
window
1. Here the object is placed below the HP and
behind the VP.
2. Here, the plane of projection is in between the
DORMER WINDOW AND GABLE WINDOW
observer and object.

A dormer window is a vertical window provided 3. Here, POP assumed to be transparent.

on the sloping roof . Such a window provides
4. used in USA
ventilation & lighting to the enclosed space below
the roof & at the same time, very much improve 18. (b) Buttress - It is a slopping or stepped

[ 413 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]
masonry projection from a tall wall. the tree, Dark in colour, Provides rigidity &
durability
19. (b) Least count of Prismatic Compass is 3. Sap wood: It is light in colour, shows recent
30', surveyor compass 15', vernier scale - 0.1mm, growth, sap moves in upward direction through
micrometer - 0.01 mm, theodolite (20'' & 15 sec- it & lie in b/w heart wood & cambium layer.
ond), for levelling staff - 5 mm. 4. Cambium layer: It is sap that has yet not
20. (a) Fish plates: Thse are used for con- converted into sap wood.
necting one rail to the next rail. Also use to resist 5. Inner bark: Protection of cambium from injury.
heavy transverse shear. Minimum 4 fish bolt are 6. Outer bark (cortex): It consists of cells of
required to connect 2 fish plate.The buckling wood fiber.
occurs if fish plates are bolted so tightly that rails 7. Medullary ray: It hold the annual rings of heart
are not allowed to slip/expansion. wood & sap wood.
28. (a) Gravity dam: It is a solid masonry or
21. (d)
concrete structure with an approximate triangu-
Tapes: lar cross-section. In such a way that external
Cloth or Linen Metallic tape Steel tape Invar tape forces exerted on it, are resisted by its own
tape Linen tape with Alloy of nickle (36%) weight.
brass or copper wires and steel (64%) 29. (a) Rafter: They supports the purlins.
Metallic Steel
They are mainly compression member and may
M I S S C a l l be subjected to shear and bending moment if the
CIVIL Ki GOLI
purlins are not placed at nodal points.
Invar Cloth/Linen
(Types of tape) Tie rod
Invar tape is used for work of highest precision
such as measurement of a base line in triangulation
survey
Sag rod
22. (b) Panel-It is the area of shutter
enclosed between the adjacent rails. Purlin

25. (c) Structure of Timber

Heart Wood
Outer Bark

Pith
Purlins: Member of truss which are supported on
the principal rafter and which transverse loads to the
truss.
Sap Wood Inner Bark
30. (c) The construction term pointing refers
to the finishing of mortar joints in masonry, be it
stone or brick.
Medullary Rays Cambium Layer
32. (b) The best saw for cutting curves in wood
is either a band saw or a scroll saw. A jigsaw
Pith can be used as well but if the curve is gradual, a
Sapwood
PH SCale jigsaw will not cut as smoothly.
CIVIL Ki GOLI Cambium layer 35. (b) A roof lantern is a daylighting archi-
Heartwood tectural element. Architectural lanterns are part
1. Pith:It is the innermost central portion consists of a larger roof and provide natural light into the
of cellular tissues & nourishes plant at young space or room below.
age. 36. (a) Methods of contouring
2. Heart (True) wood: It is the Dead portion of

[ 414 ]
 [ S. Sorout , Whatsapp - 9255624029 ]
(a) Direct Method :- 41. (b) Diagonal Scale: It is possible to
(i) When the survey area is small & suffi- measure in three dimensions such as meters,
cient time available (slow method) decimeter, centimeters & unit, tenth, hundreds.
(ii) When greater accuracy is required 42. (b)
(b) Indirect Method :-
(i) For engineering works, we use this 43. (c)
method generally.  The width of landing should not be less than width
(ii) In this method, we draw the contour of of stair.
any reduce level using the Inter polation  Minimum width of stairs in residential building –
with the help of some fixed point. 85 cm & in commercial building is 1 m.
Following are Indirect method:- 44. (d) Contour: It is an imaginary line pass-
(a) By square method:- used for small area & ing through the points of equal elevation on the
also called spot levelling. earth surface.
(b) By cross- section method:- used for railway 45. (a) Mansard Truss is also the combination
line, road line, canal alignment. of king post truss and queen post truss.
(c) By tacheometer method:- used in hilly area
• For Interpolation, following methods are used. 46. (c)
Columns
(a) By Estimation methods, (b) By Graphical
methods
(c) By arithmatical methods (by compution
method): It is best method/most accurate.
 A raft foundation is provided if its area exceeds
37. (b) Bakelite is used for making electrical the plan area of the building by 50%. It is a
switches because it is a poor conductor of heat combined footing that covers the entire area
and electricity. beneath a structure and support all the walls and
38. (d) Spike: It is used to hold rail on wooden columns. IS 2950:1981 for design of raft
sleepers. Dog spikes are used for wooden sleep- foundation.
ers with flat footed rails.  The weight of footings is assumed as 10% of the
weight transferred to the column
39. (d) According to Railway:
47. (c) Evaporation: It is the conversion of
1. Major bridges: Total waterways more than 18m liquid to the vapour phase
or having any span of clear waterways of 12 m
Precipitation: It is the deposition of water on the
or over. Earth's surface in the form of rain, snow, hail, frost &
2. Minor bridges: Total waterways < 18 m or any so on..
span of clear waterway < 12 m.
Transpiration: It is the soil moisture taken up
3. Important bridges: Total major bridge of total through the roots of a plant & discharged into the at-
water ways  18 m. or 110 m2. mosphere through evaporation. It occurs during pho-
Special Points: tosynthesis

1. Culvert - span < 6m 50. (b)

2. Minor Bridge - 6 - 30 m Nominal diameter (d): It is shank diameter in
3. Major Bridge - 30 - 120 m cold condition.Various diameters available are 8, 10,
4. Long span Bridge - above 120m 12, 16, 18, 20, 22, 25, 30 mm.
Gross diameter (d'): Diameter of the hole,
40. (d) considering that rivet fills the hole completely.
For d  25 mm, d' = d + 1.5 mm, For d > 25
Revenue Gunter’s chain Engineer’s Metric chain mm d' = d + 2 mm.
chain (surveyor chain) chain 100 ft long
33 ft 66 ft (100 links) 53. (c)
(16 link) (100 link) 30 m 20 m Half turn stairs: - It is the one which has its direc-
(150 links) (100 links)

[ 415 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]
tion reversed, or changed at 180o. the weir/barrage under free flow conditions.
Such type of stairs are quite common. These may 55. (d) The grade of concrete is defined as the
be of three types: minimum strength of concrete after 28 days. For
the M20 Grade of concrete, The letter 'M' re-
(a) Dog-legged or newel half turn stairs.
fers to the mix, and 20 represents the character-
istic strength of concrete in MPa or N/mm2.
56. (b) Pencils: The grade of a pencil lead is
generally shown by alphabets & letters marked
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Upper
Half landing at one of its ends.
space
landing
Grade HB denotes medium softs. Grade H is
D 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Up D
harder than HB & H, 2H etc. denotes hard-
ness in increasing order. Grade B is used to
denote softer than HB & B, 2B etc. denotes
Plan softness in increasing order.
DOG-LEGGED STAIR
Grades of Pensils:
9H, ..... 3H, 2H, H, F, HB, B, 2B, 3B ..... 7B.
(b) Open newel half turn stairs.
The student and professional man should be
equipped with a selection of good, well-sharp-
Up ened pencil with leads of various degrees of
hardness such as: 9H, 8H, 7H and 6H (hard);
Half
well space 5H & 4H (medium hard); 3H and 2H (me-
landing dium); and H & F (medium soft). The grade
Up of pencil to be used for various purposes de-
X
X pends on the type of line desired, the kind of
Plan paper employed and the humidity, which af-
OPEN NEWEL HALF TURN STAIRS fects the surface of the paper. Standards for
line quality usually will govern theselection. For
instance 6H is used for light construction line.
• 4H is used for re-pending light finished lines
Handrail (dimension lines Center lines, and invisible ob-
ject lines).
• 2H is used for visible object lines.
Newel • F and H are used for all lettering and freehand
work.
• If hardness increases, then pencil become
light.
• As the number of B increases ratio of graph-
Elevation ite increases, so softeness increases and pen-
Open newel half turn stairs cil become dark.
57. (a) Jack plane is a general-purpose wood-
working bench plane, used for dressing timber
54. (d) Afflux is the difference between the
down to size in preparation for truing and/or edge
flood level on the upstream and downstream of

[ 416 ]
 [ S. Sorout , Whatsapp - 9255624029 ]
jointing. bed.
Super Passage Reverse of an aque-
58. (a) Gable roof is a common type of slop- duct
ing roof which slopes in two directions. It looks Aqueduct A hydraulic structure
like an inverted/upside down V. These are not which carries a canal
ideal for the areas with high wind. cross & above the
drainage.
Vertical
triangle Ridge
63. (c) Finishing: Levelling or smoothing of
top surface of freshly placed concrete. It is done
by Screeding, Floating & Trowelling.
Gable Roof Screeding: The process of striking off the
excess concrete to bring the top surface upto
59. (b) Mortise type of chisel is used for tak- proper grade.
ing heavy and deep cuts resulting in more stock Floating: It consist of removing the irregularities
removal as in making mortises. on the surface of concrete & it is generally done
by wooden float.
60. (c) Trowelling: It is final operation of finishing & it gives
FSL a very smooth finish.

Canal
64. (d) Revolving Doors are provided in
only public Buildings (Store, Banks, Hotels etc) &
HFL AC buildings where continuous use of doors is
Stream
necessary.
 Sliding doors have shutter slides on the sides.For
Types of Cross Drainage Work Details this purpose runners & guide rails are
Canal Siphon Canal taken below provided.These are used in banks,
drainage channel & offices,garrage & workshop etc.
FSL of canal touch-  Glazed and panelled door - It is extensively used
ing bed in residential & public buildings like hospital, col-
Drainage Siphon Drainage channel
leges, offices etc.
taken below canal &
FSL touching canal 65. (c) Planimeter
bed.
Super Passage Reverse of an aque- Instrument used to measure area very accurately.
duct
Aqueduct A hydraulic structure 66. (b) Lettering
which carries a canal • Lettering is defined as writing of titles,
cross & above the
subtititles, symbols, dimensions etc on a draw-
drainage.
ing to reveal all the details connected with the
61. (c) Gauged mortar is a lime cement mor- object.
tar. In lime mortar, cement is sometimes added
to achieve early strength & it’s called gauging. • Lettering should be made clean, unambiguous,
legible, uniform style, and simple enough to be
62. (b)
practised rapidly by freehand.
Types of Cross Drainage Work Details • Nominal size: the nominal size of lettering is
Canal Siphon Canal taken below defined by the height (h) of the outline contour
drainage channel &
of the uppercase (Capital) letters.
FSL of canal touch-
ing bed Types of lettering
Drainage Siphon Drainage channel
taken below canal & • The letters are classified into two categories-
FSL touching canal single stroke and double stroke.

[ 417 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

• Indian standards recommends single stroke let-

ters in the design practice. These are simplest

Eye-vane
forms of letters and are employed in most of
the engineering drawing.

Fiducial edge
Note: Lettering is just freehand drawing.
Do You Know ?

Object vane
Single stroke does not mean that lettering
should be done in single stroke without lifting
the pencil, it implies that the thickness of the
letter should be uniform such that it is obtained
in single stroke of pencil.
Alidade
• Single stroke letters are of two types viz. Alidade: It is used for sighting the objects & drawing
(i) vertical (ii) inclined. the lines.Plane Alidade for horizontal & tele-
scopic Alidade for inclined line of sight.
Inclined letters lean to the right, the slope be- 69. (c) The special treatment provided to plastered
ing 75° with the horizontal (or 15° with verti- walls at their lower level, usually in drawing and
cal). living rooms of a building is called skirting.
• Indian standards further classify the lettering 70. (d)
into four categories as: Creep of the rail: It is the longitudinal movement
of rail wrt sleepers in a track and its value varies from
Lettering 'A '  0-16 cm.
 Theories of creep
Lettering 'B'  Use pencil and ink drawing
Wave Action theory Percursion theory Drag theory
Lettering 'CA ' Due to horizontal
Vertical reverse curve Drag of driving wheel
component of the of locomotive have
Wave motion is set up resultant impact
by moving loads of wheel force at the rail end opposite effect wrt.
direction of creep.
• In lettering 'A' type, the height of the capital
letter is divided into 14 parts and in lettering Measurement of Creep
'B' types. It is divided into 10 parts.  Maximum permitted creep on BG track is 150 mm
 Creep should be measured at an Interval of about
67. (d) 3 month.
68. (d)  No creep should be permitted on points & cross-
ings.
Prevention of creep:
(i) Using steel sleepers
(ii) Pulling back rails to original position
(iii) By providing sufficient crib ballast & anchors
Factors affecting creep of the rail:
(i) Alignment of track: Observed greater on curves
than tangent railway track.
(ii) More creep in the direction of heaviest traffic.
(iii) Type of rails: Old rails have more creep than
new rails.
(iv) Grade of track: More creep in downward steep
gradients.

[ 418 ]
 [ S. Sorout , Whatsapp - 9255624029 ]
71. (b) Paleo Irrigation: It is watering done mate
prior to sowing of crop.
Revise estimate: Estimate is revised If
Delta: It is denoted by & expressed in cm or m.
It is the total depth of water applied over an irrigated (a) When the expenditure of work exceeds
land at different watering throughout entire base by more than 10% of the administrative
period. approval.
Kor Watering (Kor period): First watering after (b) When a sanctioned estimate's variation is
the plants have grown few centimetres. Kor period more than 5% due to any cause except impor-
for rice (2 - 4 weeks) Wheat (3-8 weeks). tant structural alterations.
73. (a) Coffer Dam: It is a temporary struc- 77. (d)
ture constructed in river,dam, lake etc to keep
Types of roofs:
the working area dry for construction of other
 Gable roof is a common type of sloping roof
structure. After the construction of coffer dam,
which slopes in two directions. It looks like an
area is dewatered by pumping.
inverted/upside down V. These are not ideal for
75. (a) Types of Estimate the areas with high wind.
• Preliminary or Approximate Estimate or Ab-  Gambrel roof slopes in two direction but there
stract Estimate: is break in each slope. It is most commonly use
on barns. It has the benefit of providing a good
It is required for preliminary studies of various amount of space in the attic.
aspect of a project or work, to decide the finan-  Flat roofs are common in commercial building.
cial position & policy for administrative action by  Pitched roofs are use in areas of heavy rain
the competent authority. falls and snow fall. The slope of roof shall be
more than 10°. They may have slopes upto 45-
 In it various quantities are worked out with the
60°. These are preferred in large span structure
help of many short
like as workshops, warehouses, factory buildings
cuts. etc.
 Mansard roof is a french design & it is more
 It is an estimate which is very near to final esti-
mate. difficult to construct than the hip or gable roof.
It slopes in the four directions but each slope
• Plinth Area Estimate:Square Meter Method has a break.
This is prepared on the basis of plinth area (B
Vertical
Ridge
L) of building. triangle

• Cube Rate Estimate:

It is prepared on the basis of the cubical contents Lean-to-Roof
Gable Roof
(LBH) of the building.
• Detailed or Item Rate Estimate: Ridge

It is an most accurate & reliable method.It con-

sists of working out the quantities of each item
of works and working the cost.
Mansard Roof
• Building cost Index is an index number that
measures the average rate of input construction Ridge
Stopped Hip
cost changes of categorized building in compari- Triangle Ridge Hip

son with that of the reference month.

Special point: Degree of Accuracy (descreasing or- Hip Roof Gambrel Roof

der)
Detailed > Cube rate > Plinth area > Rough esti-

[ 419 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

Fink Truss – It is used for longer span having

Deck high pitch roof. The web members in such truss
are Sub-divided to obtain shorter members.

Deck Roof
Howe Truss – This type of truss is a combination of
steel & wood, which makes it elegant, while also
 Butterfly roofs is provide plenty of light & offering a very appealing design. It has a very wide
ventilation but not the effective when it comes span, as it can cover anything from 6-30m.
to water drainage.
86. (c) Terazzo flooring: It is laid in thin layer
 Hip roof, also called hipped roof, roof that slopes
over concrete topping. It is very decorative &
upward from all sides of a structure, having no
has good wearing properties. It is mostly used in
vertical ends. The hip is the external angle at
residential buildings, Hospitals, offices, schools
which adjacent sloping sides of a roof meet. The
& other public buildings
degree of such an angle is referred to as the hip
bevel  In it, marble chips size is 3 to 6 mm.
 The flooring in which base concrete of lime, ce-
79. (b) Contour: It is an imaginary line pass- ment & concrete of mix 1:5:10 is laid over well
ing through the points of equal elevation on the compacted sub base is called terrazao flooring.
earth surface.  The terrazzo flooring consists of 2 layers, the base
Contour Interval: Vertical distance between layer of concrete or the cushioning layer and the
consecutive contour. It is desirable to have constant top layer of terrazzo aggregates.
contour interval through the map. 87. (a) A miter joint is a union between two
80. (c) pieces, each cut at an angle, at a corner. Com-
Agonic Line: It is line passing through points of zero monly, as for painting and picture frames, the two
declination. ends of the two boards are cut at a 45-degree
Isogonic Line: It is Line passing through the points angle and placed next to one another to form a
on earth surface at which the declination is same corner of the frame. However, the angles can
at given time. and do vary.
81. (a) Tuck Pointing - In this type of pointing, 88. (a)
the mortar is first pressed in the raked joints and
after it is finished flush with the face of the wall.
B
82. (b)
Tie
Gauges in Railway Track: It's the clear distance e
i h
between inner faces/ running faces of two track rails. 1
Tie
6
2
Broad Gauge = 1.676m 7 3
C 8
Narrow Gauge = 0.762m 9 j D
4

Meter Gauge = 1.0 m k

Light gauge (Feather track) = 0.610 m f
g
Standard gauge = 1.435m (Delhi metro) (In
generally UK and USA)
83. (a) Stucco is used like any other plaster to
cover the bricks or concrete surfaces and give A
an appealing and finished look. It is made up of
OPC, fine aggregate and water. It is very com- (i) Main station : It is a point in chain survey where
mon in India and goes by the name “Plaster“. two sides of triangle meet. In above figure, A,
B, C, D are main stations.
84. (c) King post truss – The spacing of the (ii) Base line: It is the longest survey line from which
king post truss is limited to 3m centre to cen- direction of all other survey lines are fixed. In
tre. The truss is suitable for spans varying from above figure, AB is the base line.Colby appara-
5 - 8 meters. tus is used for the measurement of Base lines.

[ 420 ]
 [ S. Sorout , Whatsapp - 9255624029 ]
(iii) Main survey line: Chain line joining two main = 330
survey stations. In above figure, AD, DB, BC,  Head room must not be less than 2.05 m.
CA, BA are main survey lines.  The width of landing should not be less than width
(vi) Tie station or subsidiary station: Station on sur- of stair.
vey line joining main stations. It is helpful for 97. (b) Queen post truss – This truss differs
locating interior details. In above figure, e, f, g, from a king post truss having two vertical post,
h, i are the tie stations. known as queen posts. This truss is suitable
(v) Proof line or check line: It is provided to check for 8-12m spans.
the accuracy of the field work. In above figure,
Ck & Dj are check lines.
91. (a) Crop period: It is the time between
sowing of crop & its harvesting.
Base period: It is the time between first watering
& last watering done before harvesting.
Crop period>Base period
Duty: It is expressed in hectare per cumec. It is
the area of land in hectares that can be irrigated when
one cumec of water is supplied throughout entire base
period.
Delta: It is denoted by & expressed in cm or m.
It is the total depth of water applied over an irrigated
land at different watering throughout entire base
period.
8.64
= B
D
meters, B  Base period in days, D hec/
m3/sec
92. (d)
Soffit: It is the underside of a stair.
Newel Post: It is vertical member which is placed at
end of flights to connects the ends of strings & hand
rail.
Balustrade: It consist of a row of Balusters su
93. (b) Fire resistant mortar - The paste is pre-
pared by mixing aluminous cement and finely
crushed fire bricks in suitable proportions in ad-
dition to water. The usual proportion are 1 part
aluminous cement to 2 parts of finely crushed
fire bricks.
96. (a)  For making spiral staircase, ideal
material is cast iron
 Width of stair in Domestic building 90 cm & in
public Building, (1.5-1.8)m.
 No. of steps are not more than 12 & not less than
3 in a flight.
 Angle of Inclination (Pitch) – (25° – 40°) & Maxi-
mum pitch or slope in staircase for public building

[ 421 ]
 [ S. Sorout , Whatsapp - 9255624029 ]

UPSSC DRAFTSMAN PAPER

27-12-2015
1. Which of the following is not the type of (d) Cleat wiring
slab?
6. As per I.S. 1172-1993 (3rd REVISED) the
(a) One way slab
required water per person per day in do-
(b) Three way slab mestic residential use is-
(c) Two way slab (a) 115 Liter
(d) R.B. slab (b) 170 liter
2. Which of the following type of building de- (c) 100 Liter
sign and planning are necessary from the (d) 135 Liter
climate point of view nowadays?
7. Which of the following is not the type of
(a) Sky scraper apartments
sewage system?
(b) Green building
(a) Separate system
(c) Normal residential building
(b) Sullage system
(d) Normal commercial buildings
(c) Combined system
3. Which of the following is not source of sur- (d) Partially separate system
face water?
8. Which of the following type of sourvey is
(a) Lakes
not done by wing survey equipment in the
(b) Reservoirs method of surveying?
(c) Springs (a) Theodolite survey
(d) Rivers (b) Mine survey
4. A wall 4 m long, 3 m high and 30 cm wide (c) Compass survey
is constructed and plastered (both side of (d) Plane table survey
wall). If cost of the construction of wall is
Rs. 150 per cubic meter and rate of the 9. Which of the following trap is not used in
plaster are Rs. 10 per sq. m, then the to- the sewage drainage system of resi-
tal estimated cost of the above work is: dences?
(a) Rs. 780 (a) Water seal trap
(b) Rs. 925 (b) P-trap
(c) Rs. 670 (c) Nahani trap
(d) Rs. 720 (d) s-trap

5. Nowdays in cities, which type of electrical 10. What is the full form of M.C.B. used is
wiring is not preferred in modern building? electrical engineering and wiring?
(a) P.V.C casing capping wiring (a) Mini Circuit Breaker
(b) Surface conduit wiring (b) Miniature Circuit Breaker
(c) Concealed conduit wiring (c) Main Circuit Breaker

[ 431 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

(d) Middle Circuit Breaker (b) L-beam

11. Which of the following is no concrete (c) Simply supported beam
bridge? (d) P-beam
(a) Solid slab bridge 17. Which of the following is not dry building
(b) Box Girder Bridge material?
(c) T-beam Bridge (a) marble
(d) Z-beam bridge (b) Brick
12. Which of the following is not the survey (c) Paint
method of levelling (level difference)? (d) Cement
(a) Right angle levelling 18. Which of the following method is not used
(b) Barometric levelling for making the perspective view after
(c) Trignocometric levelling Planning and design of the building?

(d) Spirit levelling (a) Two point view

(b) Birds eye view
13. Which of the following unit is used to mea-
sure Reinforced Cement Concrete (c) One point view
(R.C.C.) in building estimate. (d) Five point view
(a) Sq. metre 19. In which place cement mortar is used:
(b) Running meter (a) Polishing in wood
(c) Cubic meter (b) Construction of brick wall
(d) Quintal (c) On the top of mosaic flooring
14. Which of the following print is submitted (d) In painting of wall
to development authority or other map
20. Which of the following term is not related
sanctioning department repared by follow-
with the building estimate?
ing laws and bylaws ?
(a) Lump sum estimate
(a) Black print
(b) Item wise estimate
(b) Blue Print
(c) Group estimate
(c) Yellow print
(d) Detailed estimate
(d) Green print
21. For which purpose protective material
15. How many days of curing are necessary for
DPC Powder is used in the building?
concrete work in the building in winter
moist season? (a) Diluting the paint

(a) 6 days (b) For damp proofing of wall

(b) 14 days (c) For finishing floor

(c) 20 days (d) For sound insulation

(d) 8 days 22. Which type of building is specially con-

structed with the help of Reinforced Ce-
16. Which of the following is not the type of
ment Concrete (R.C.C.)?
beam?
(a) Earthquake resistance
(a) T-beam

[ 432 ]
 [ S. Sorout , Whatsapp - 9255624029 ]
(b) Normal building ture which of the following is not used?
(c) Green bhawan (a) Fabricated wall panel
(d) Load bearing building (b) Fabricated door and windows
23. In estimating and costing the earthwork (c) Fabricated frame
excavation of foundation is measured in (d) Fabricated tiles
which unit?
29. Which of the following word is not related
(a) Running meter to brick?
(b) Square meter (a) Strecher
(c) Kilogram (b) Queen closer
(d) Cubic meter (c) Bat
24. Why expansion joint is constructed in the (d) Ashlar
buildings?
30. What is full form of S.T.P. are related to
(a) To reduce the strength of the building house drainage and sanitary engineering?
(b) To make beautiful buildings (a) Sewage Treatment Plant
(c) The roof slab of building are expanded in (b) Society Treatment Plant
hot summer and roof do not crack
(c) Service Treatment Plant
(d) The shape of the building is changed
(d) System Treatment Plant
25. The main aim of the foundation in the
31. Construction work of the building is con-
building is:
trolled by C.P.M. after planning of build-
(a) To prevent sinking of the building in the ing. What is the full form of C.P.M.
earth
(a) Critical Path Method
(b) Act as water proofing in building
(b) Cement Plastic Method
(c) Act as anti-termite in the building
(c) Critical Planning Method
(d) To reduce the strength of building
(d) Cement Plaster Method
26. Which of the following is not the main re-
32. The measurement of a brick is 230 mm ×
quirement for the planning of residential
115 mm × 75 mm, which of the following
building:
is the measure of its stretcher?
(a) Size of plot
(a) 115 mm × 75 mm
(b) Main requirement (rooms)
(b) 230 mm × 115 m
(c) North direction
(c) 230 mm × 75 mm
(d) Landscape
(d) None of is the above
27. Which of the following word is not used in
33. Which of the following material is not used
the construction of brick wall?
as a damp proofing material for building?
(a) Brushing
(a) Tapercrete
(b) English bond
(b) Rubber solution
(c) Toothing
(c) DPC powder
(d) Header
(d) Fair made
28. For the construction of fabricated struc-

[ 433 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

34. Which of the following is the right answer (b) Making design in the corner of the room
for the English bonded wall? (c) Making design in the arches
(a) Alternate header and stretcher in same (d) Construction of wall
course
40. 1.5 sq. m. Granite is required for the top
(b) One course of strencher
of the kichen platform. Given the cost of
(c) Only stretcher are provided in every the granite is Rs. 3000 per sq. m. Then
course find the estimated cost of the above work.
(d) Header is provided vertically in each (a) Rs. 4550
course
(b) Rs. 4500
35. Which of the following material is not (c) Rs. 5000
stone, which are used in building?
(d) Rs. 4450
(a) Marble
41. For the construction of load bearing wall
(b) Slate
foundation first layer provided is called
(c) Granite L.C. What is the full form L.C.?
(d) Graphite (a) Lime Concrete
36. From the ancient time lime is not used in (b) Lead Cement
the building for which purpose? (c) Lean Concrete
(a) Give strength to the flooring (d) Lower Compound
(b) Construction of brick masonry in building
42. Which of the following purpose the arches
(c) For white washing of wall serve in residential building from architec-
(d) For making the lintel above doors and win- tural point of view?
dows (a) To separate two rooms
37. On the drawing of map in CAD software (b) For beautification only
to make computer aided drafting. Which (c) To given strength to the building
of the following scale maps are prepared
(d) Two rooms to be used together as per
in computer screen.
need
(a) 1 : 200
43. Portland pazzolona cement is specially
(b) 1 : 2
used for the construction of which special
(c) 1 : 00 type of construction?
(d) 1 : 1 (a) Residential building construction
38. Which of the following types of wall are not (b) Public building construction
constructed in the building? (c) Education building construction
(a) Load bearing wall (d) Marine building construction
(b) Retaining wall
44. Which of the following technical term is
(c) Non load bearing wall not used for the construction of staircase?
(d) Boundary wall (a) Middle rail
39. White cement is not used normally in (b) Riser
which place of the building: (c) Hand rail
(a) For making the plaster surface smooth

[ 434 ]
 [ S. Sorout , Whatsapp - 9255624029 ]
(d) Nosing Consideration also of laws and blaws are
submitted to development authorities and
45. Which of the following are used for the
other map sanctioning department. The
storage of the clean water in the building?
name of the drawing is:
(a) Soak pit
(a) Working drawing
(b) Water tank
(b) Presentation drawing
(c) Septic tank
(c) Corporation/submission
(d) Inspection chamber
(d) Conceptually/architectural drawing
46. For the construction of building normally
51. In which of the following work, wood is not
lintel is constructed at which of the follow-
used as a main building material for resi-
ing level ?
dential building?
(a) On the top of the doors and windows
(a) Making door frame
chaukhat
(b) Making flooring of kitchen
(b) At the starting level of window
(c) Making door leaves
(c) In slab
(d) Making the fruniture
(d) Just below the slab
52. For the covering of pitched roof, which of
47. In drafting of drawing in CAD, print from
the following material is not used mainly?
Printer/plotter is taken. Which of the fol-
lowing is the largest size of paper ? (a) G.I. sheet
(a) A1-size (b) Fiber sheet
(b) A3-size (c) A.C. sheet
(c) A2-size (d) Hot sheet
(d) A0-size 53. On the drafting of drawing from auto CAD,
offset command is used mainly for which
48. A room is 4 m long and 3 m wide, the tile
of the following work?
flooring is required for the floor of the
room. The cost of 1 sq. m Title is Rs. 750/ (a) Making perpendicular line
- Then find out the total estimated cost of (b) Draw the parallel line and shape
the above work: (c) Curve line draws with given line
(a) Rs. 9000/- (d) Making an angle
(b) Rs. 8750/-
54. Which of the following type of dry build-
(c) Rs. 9050/- ing material mainly is not applied in the
(d) Rs. 8975/- building?
49. Which of the following building material is (a) Mixed with water
not used for the construction of staircase? (b) Making mortar
(a) Wood (c) Directly apply to the surface
(b) R.C.C. (d) Mixed with adhesive material
(c) Cork 55. For the pure construction of Reinforced
(d) R.B.C. Cement Concrete (R.C.C.) Structure,
which of the following building material is
50. After preparing the drawing with due,
used minimum?

[ 435 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

(a) Concrete following is the full form of this?

(b) Brick (a) Electric Leakage Current Breaker
(c) Steel (b) Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker
(d) Cement and coarse sand (c) Electric Leakage Circuit Breaker
56. Which of the following level is known as (d) Earth Leakage Current Breaker
sill level of the building? 62. On drafting of drawing from the computer
(a) Below the plinth level by auto CAD software if we want to use
(b) Above the lintel level erase command directly from key board,
then which of the following method is
(c) Starting level of the window
adopted ?
(d) At ground level
(a) O(Enter)
57. Which of the following are not the types (b) E(Enter)
of surveys according to its nature of the
(c) Ex(Enter)
area?
(d) L-Control
(a) Marine or hydrographic surveys
(b) Land surveys 63. On the planning of cities when we prepare
the master plan and layout of roads in resi-
(c) Astronomical surveys
dential as well as other area then roads
(d) All of the above end are blocked in town planning design
58. Nowadays which of the following are not then that end is known as:
popular as modular? (a) Dead end
(a) Modular electric switches (b) Middle end
(b) Modular brick wall (c) Cul-de-sac
(c) Modular kitchen (d) Road end
(d) Modular Brick 64. For the design of arches and staircase,
59. Which of the following mainly water is not which of the following technical term is
stored in following water supply and sani- used in both designs?
tary engineering of houses: (a) Soffit
(a) Water tank (b) Landing
(b) Flushing cistern (c) Crown
(c) Fixed water purifier or aqua guard (d) Flight
(d) Gyeser 65. l/d ratio of simply supported beam is:
60. Which of the following technical word is (a) 25
not related to building construction work? (b) 24
(a) Shuttering (c) 22
(b) Drafting (d) 20
(c) Toothing
66. M-20 concrete mix is
(d) English bond
(a) 1 : 2 : 4 (b) 1 : 3 : 6
61. On doing electrical wiring in the building
the (E.L.C.B) term is used. Which of the

[ 436 ]
 [ S. Sorout , Whatsapp - 9255624029 ]
(c) Dove tail joint
1
(c) 1:1 : 3 (d) 1 : 4 : 8 (d) None of the above
2
74. Arrange in increasing order from footing
67. The Ly/Lx ratio for a two way slab is:
to slab in a building
(a) = 2.0 (b) < 2.0
(a) D.P.C. Door, window, lintel
(c) = 1 (d) > 2.0
(b) D.P.C. windown, door, lintel
68. Minimum reinforcement is provided in
(c) D.P.C. lintel, door, window
R.C.C. slab:
(d) None of the above
(a) Central strip
75. A residential use is permitted in which of
(b) Side strip
the following?
(c) Middle strip
(a) Education zone
(d) Edge strip
(b) Residential zone
69. The minimum number of bars in circular
(c) Commercial zone
columns is:
(d) Industrial zone
(a) 4
76. A uniform slope is indicated by contours
(b) 5
that are:
(c) 6
(a) Straight line
(d) 6
(b) Pointing up hill
70. Maximum oxide composition of Portland
(c) Close together
cement is:
(d) Evently spaced
(a) CaO
77. Building construction costs are signifi-
(b) SiO2
cantly influenced by the:
(c) Al2O3
(a) Executor
(d) MgO
(b) Rate of inflation
71. Admixture is used in concrete for:
(c) Estimator
(a) Damp proofing
(d) Contractor
(b) Reinforcing
78. The regular occurrence of elements of
(c) Add water building is known as:
(d) Reduce cement (a) Balance
72. Size of traditional brick is: (b) Rhythm
(a) 10 mm × 100 mm × 200 mm (c) Symmetry
(b) 75 mm × 115 mm × 230 mm (d) Proportion
(c) 90 mm × 130 mm × 200 mm 79. Expansion joints in building are spaced at
(d) 1000 mm × 115 mm × 230 mm distance not more than:
73. Joint used in steel frame is: (a) 20 m
(a) Mortice joint (b) 30 m
(b) Riveted joint (c) 40 m

[ 437 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

(d) 50 m (c) Freedom rubble masonry

80. An ornamental projection from the face of (d) Dry rubble masonry
a masonry wall is: 87. What is the full form of B.I.S. in Indian
(a) Carbel standard (I.S.) code of practice for Plain
(b) Conrnice and Reinforced Concrete?

(c) Header (a) Bureau of Indian Investigation

(d) Stretcher (b) Board of Indian Standards

(c) Building important Service
81. A load-bearing wall is designed to carry:
(d) Bureau of Indian Standards
(a) Vertical load
(b) Live load 88. Which of the following temporary struc-
ture (shoring) are not used for the con-
(c) Imposed load
struction of building?
(d) Wind load
(a) Dead shores
82. Lime stone is: (b) Flying shores
(a) Metamorphic rock (c) Live shores
(b) Granite rock (d) Raking shores
(c) Sedimentary rock
89. Which of the following measurement for
(d) Igneous rock traditional brick is correct?
83. Fly ash is added incement to: (a) 230 mm × 115mm × 75 mm
(a) Reduce the strength of cement (b) 230 mm × 150 mm × 100 mm
(b) Reduce the water in cement (c) 250 mm × 140 mm × 60 mm
(c) Reduce the weight of cement (d) 235 mm × 145 mm × 90 mm
(d) None of the above 90. At which level Damp Proof Course
84. Timber can be used in: (D.P.C.) is provided for the construction
of the building?
(a) Roofing
(a) At ground level
(b) Columns
(b) At lintel level
(c) Pile foundation
(c) At slab level
(d) None of above
(d) At plinth level
85. The seasoning of timber is done in follow-
ing way: 91. Which of the following is correct compo-
sition of lime?
(a) Hot dryings
(a) CaCl 2
(b) Sun drying
(b) CaO
(c) Drying
(c) MgO
(d) None of above
(d) NaCl
86. Which of the following are not the types
of stone masonry? 92. Which of the following main plan is re-
quired for designing and planning of new
(a) Uncoursed rubble masonry
desircted/city?
(b) Random rubble masonry

[ 438 ]
 [ S. Sorout , Whatsapp - 9255624029 ]
(a) ELectrical plan (b) Guide Positioning System
(b) Site plan (c) Global Positioning System
(c) Master plan (d) Graphic Positioning System
(d) Building plan 99. Which of the following method are not
93. Which of the following main three com- used in damp proofing
pounds are found is Portland cement? (a) Integral damp proofing
(a) Sulphur, magnesia and managanese (b) Surface damp proofing
(b) Iron oxide, salt and Sulphate (c) Membrance damp proofing
(c) Lime, silica and alumina (d) None of above
(d) Potassium oxide, lime and Sulphur 100. Which of the following term is not used for
94. Which of the following is not a type of the construction of arches?
shallow foundation? (a) Ledged
(a) Spread footing (b) Intrados
(b) Grilling foundation (c) Span
(c) Raft foundation (d) Crown
(d) Cassion 101. Taking the line command direct from the
95. Which of the following joint is not used for key board of computer which of the follow-
the framing of wood? ing is to be done so that command is ready
to draw the line for drafting.
(a) Bearing joint
(a) O-Control
(b) Framing joint
(b) L (Enter)
(c) Expansion joint
(c) E (Enter)
(d) Longitudinal joint
(d) L (Control)
96. Which of the following foundation is a deep
foundation? 102. Which of the technical term is not used in
carpentry joints?
(a) Combined footing
(a) Chamfering
(b) Pile foundation
(b) Clerk of works
(c) Eccentricially loaded footing
(c) Rebating
(d) Mat foundation
(d) Housing
97. Which of following is not a type of scaffold-
ing ? 103. Normally which type of arch is not con-
structed in buildings?
(a) Steel scaffolding
(a) Flat arch
(b) Wooden scaffolding
(b) Semi-circular arch
(c) Needle scaffolding
(c) Zig-zag arch
(d) Paper scaffolding
(d) Segmental arch
98. Which of the following is the full forjm of
G.P.S. used in surveying? 104. Which of the following type of flooring is
most suitable for the modern residence of
(a) Ground Positioning System
Cities?

[ 439 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

(a) Brick flooring of building?

(b) Rubber flooring (a) Fire Air Ratio
(c) Mud flooring (b) Floor Area Ratio
(d) Marble flooring (c) Front Area Ratio
105. Which of the following is not the tempo- (d) Function Area Ratio
rary work in the building? 111. Which of the following is the type of stair-
(a) Shuttering case?
(b) Scaffolding (a) Dog-legged stair
(c) Shoring (b) Circular stair
(d) None of above (c) Bifurcated stair
106. Which of the following type of flooring is (d) All of above
most suitable for the dancing room? 112. Maximum number of steps constructed in
(a) Cement concrete flooring one fight for the construction of staircase
(b) Wooden flooring followed as pe the standards.

(c) Tiles flooring (a) 8 Nos

(d) Masaic flooring (b) 10 Nos

(c) 14 Nos
107. Which of the following technical term is
not used for the construction of staircase (d) 20 Nos
in the building? 113. Which of the following is not the type of
(a) Tread pitched roof?
(b) Winder (a) Lean to roof
(c) Nosing (b) Flat roof
(d) Batten (c) Coupled roof
108. Which of the following command is used (d) Collar roof
in auto cad for trimming the line? 114. Given that area of plot is 500 sq.m. and
(a) Copy command for total constructed area of all the floors
(b) Line command for building is 400 sq.m. Find out the
F.A.R.
(c) Trim command
(a) 1.25
(d) Erase command
(b) 2.50
109. The measurement of tread and riser for
(c) 2.25
the staircase construction used normally
in public building: (d) 1.50
(a) 30 cm and 15 cm 115. Which of the following technical term is
(b) 25 cm and 12 cm not used for the construction of Staircases
in any building?
(c) 30 cm and 12 cm
(a) Plan of stairs
(d) 25 cm and 16 cm
(b) Stairs well
110. Which of the following is the full form of
(c) Section of stairs
F.A.R. for the designing and construction

[ 440 ]
 [ S. Sorout , Whatsapp - 9255624029 ]
(d) Elevation of Stairs (b) Pure water
116. Which of the following is not the type of (c) Tile
roof? (d) Slate
(a) Flat roof 122. Which of the following drawing is not
(b) Pitched roof made with the help of Computer Aided
(c) Sloppy roof Drafting (CAD)?

(d) Coffer roof (a) Plan of building

(b) Internal section of the building
117. Which of the following answer is correct
in respect of cantilever construction in (c) Elevation of building
building? (d) All of above
(a) One end is resting on the column or wall 123. Which of the following technical term is
and other end is free normally not used in the laws and by laws
(b) One end is resting on wall and other end Building?
is resting on column (a) Mezzanine floor
(c) Both ends are resting on the wall (b) F.A.R.
(d) Both ends are resting on the column (c) Front set back
118. Which of the following term (technical) is (d) Ground coverage
on related to the pitched roof construc-
124. Which of the following is more important
tion?
and necessary in designing and planning
(a) Eaves of the residential building?
(b) Vally (a) Elevation of building and colours
(c) Hip (b) Proper use of all the spaces in building and
(d) Nosing natural ventilation
119. Which of the following are not the types (c) Shape of the building
of terracing for construction roof? (d) Floor design of the building
(a) Lime concrete terracing 125. Which of the following software of draft-
(b) Mud phuska terracing with tile paving ing the walls draw directly in double Line
(c) Lime concrete terracing with tile paving and work can do on the level?

(d) Wooden terracing (a) Autocad-2015 software

(b) Photoshop software
120. Which of the following material is not used
for the covering of sloppy roof ? (c) Coral draw software
(a) Thatch (d) Ravit software
(b) Pure water 1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (c) 4. (a)
(c) Tile 5. (b) 6. (d) 7. (b) 8. (b)
(d) Slate 9. (a) 10. (b) 11. (d) 12. (a)
121. Which of the following technical term is 13. (c) 14. (b) 15. (b) 16. (d)
not used for making the site plan?
17. (c) 18. (d) 19. (b) 20. (c)
(a) Thatch
21. (b) 22. (a) 23. (d) 24. (c)

[ 441 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]
25. (a) 26. (d) 27. (a) 28. (d) 2. (c)
29. (d) 30. (a) 31. (a) 32. (c) 3. (c) Various sources of water for supply -
33. (d) 34. (a) 35. (d) 36. (d) (a) Surface water source - Streams & rivers,
natural ponds & lakes, Impounding reservoirs.
37. (a) 38. (b) 39. (d) 40. (b)
(b) Ground water source - Infiltration galleries,
41. (c) 42. (b) 43. (d) 44. (a) springs, infiltration wells and tube-wells.
45. (b) 46. (a) 47. (d) 48. (a) 4. (a)
49. (c) 50. (c) 51. (b) 52. (d) Volume of brick work = L × B × H = 4 × 3 × 0.3
= 3.6 m3
53. (b) 54. (c) 55. (b) 56. (c)
Total cost of construction of wall = 3.6 × 150 =
57. (*) 58. (b) 59. (d) 60. (b) 540
Total plaster work (on both side) = 2 × 4 × 3 = 24
61. (b) 62. (b) 63. (c) 64. (a)
m2
65. (d) 66. (c) 67. (b) 68. (*) Total cost of plaster work = 24 × 10 = 240
69. (c) 70. (a) 71. (d) 72. (b) Hence, Total estimated cost = 540 + 240 = 780
5. (b)
73. (b) 74. (a) 75. (b) 76. (d)
6. (d) Water Demands: IS 10500:2012
77. (b) 78. (b) 79. (b) 80. (b)
for Specifications of drinking water
81. (c) 82. (c) 83. (d) 84. (d) (i) Domestic Water Demand: 135 to 225 lpcd. &
85. (d) 86. (c) 87. (d) 88. (c) 50-60% of total water consumption.
 The IS code lays down a limit on domestic
89. (a) 90. (d) 91. (b) 92. (c) water consumption between 135 to 225
lpcd.
93. (c) 94. (d) 95. (c) 96. (c)
 Under general conditions (as per IS 1172 :
97. (d) 98. (c) 99. (d) 100. (a) 1993) the minimum domestic water demand
for a town with full flushing system should
101. (b) 102. (b) 103. (c) 104. (d)
be taken at 200 lpcd while it can be re-
105. (d) 106. (b) 107. (d) 108. (c) duced to 135 lpcd for economical weaker
sections & LIG colonies (Low income
109. (a) 110. (b) 111. (d) 112. (c) group) depending upon prevailing conditions.
113. (b) 114. (*) 115. (a) 116. (d)  The components of domestic water demand
are (per capita per day)
117. (a) 118. (d) 119. (d) 120. (b) (a) Drinking – 5 litre
121. (b) 122. (d) 123. (a) 124. (b) (b) Cooking – 5 litre
(c) Bathing – 55 litre
125. (a) (d) Cloth washing – 20 litre
1. (b) Slabs: Plate elements having depth (e) Utensils washing – 10 litre
much smaller than its other two dimensions. (f) House washing – 10 litre
 They carry distributed load primarily by bending (g) Flushing of water closets – 30 litre
Total = 135 lpcd
One way slab Two way slab
For an average Indian town the requirement
ly Constant ly of water in various uses is as under:
>2 deflection <2
lx along longer lx Domestic purpose – 135 lpcd
span
Industrial use – 40 lpcd
Parabolic deflection Parabolic deflection
along shorter span along both span Public use – 25 lpcd

[ 442 ]
 [ S. Sorout , Whatsapp - 9255624029 ]
Fire demand – 15 lpcd (iv) Geological Survey: It is conducted to obtain
data of different strata of earth’s surface for
Losses, wastage & thefts – 55 lpcd
the purpose of geological studies.
Total = 270 lpcd (v) Cadastral Survey : It is used to produce plans
(ii) Institutional & commerical water demand. It is of property boundries for legal purpose. The
generally considered 20 lpcd. revenue chain is used in cadastral surveying.
(a) School & colleges : 45 to 135 lpcd Also called public land survey.
(b) Offices : 45 lpcd (vi) Astronomic Survey: It is conducted for de-
termination of azimuths, latitudes, longitudes,
(c) Cinema & theater : 15 lpcd local time etc. at various places on the earth by
(d) Hotels: 180 lpcd observing heavenly bodies. Absolute location of
(e) Restaurants: 70 lpcd a point on earth surface is obtained by it.
(iii) Fire Demand: 1 lpcd Classification based on instrument used -
7. (b) Types of Sewerage System Chain surveying , Compass surveying, Theodolite sur-
vey, Levelling survey, Contouring, EDM sur-
1. Combined System vey, Photogrammetric survey, Tacheometric
• The collection, treatment and disposal of survey.
sanitary & storm sewage is done by a common 9. (a) Trap - It is used to prevent entry of
sewer. foul gases into the house. It’s efficiency depend
• It is provided for the areas having low inten- upon depth of water seal. In it, General depth of
sity rainfall. water seal is (25 – 75) mm.
2. Separate System Trap Classification
• The sanitary sewage and storm sewage
collection, treatments and disposal done by two
different sewers. Shape Bases Purpose Bases
• It is provided for the areas having frequently P Q S
high intensity rainfall. Intercepting Gully Floor
• It is formed more economically  There are 3 kinds of traps – P, Q and S trap. Depth
3. Partially Combined System of a trap seal would depend upon the usage of a
• The movement of both sewage is done by pipe. The trap seal varies from 2.5 cm to 7.5 cm
separate system in normal conditions. But deep.
during high rainfall, storm sewage is diverted to- S trap: This trap is similar to P trap & is used for
wards sanitary sewer line. Design life of sewer- fixing water closets in toilets. The only differ-
age system is 40 years. ence between S trap & P trap is that S trap is
used for outlet through the floor while P trap is
• It is provided for the areas having high inten-
used for outlet through the wall.
sity rainfall during specific time. Sewerage sys- P trap: This trap is used with Indian water closet
tem are design for DWF (Dry Weather Flow). (ORISSA Pattern).This trap has water seal &
8. (b) Classifiaction of Surveying prevents entry of foul gases to the house. This
Based on Purpose trap is made form cast iron or UPV sheet. It is
(i) Topographical Survey: It is conducted to ob- provided at the end of water closet. The slope
tain data & to make a map indicating inequalites of outlets of P - Trap below the horizontal is kept
of land surface. Topographic Survey is done to 14o.
determine the Natural features of a Country.  The height of sink of wash basin above floor
Scale range is 1 : 25000 to 1 : 1000000. level is commonly 75 80cm..
(ii) Hydrographic Survey: It is conducted on or
 Intercepting trap is provided at the junction of
near water bodies. Marine survey is also one of
house sewer and a municipal sewer so as to pre-
it’s type.
vent the entry of foul gases of the municipal sewer
(iii) Engineering Survey: It is used for design &
construction of new routes (roads & railways). into the house.
Also used to calculate for route alignment.

[ 443 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

which water start boiling.

Tight fitting plug Inspection arm or
or lid called rodding arm 13. (c)
cleaning eye
Inlet from Description Unit
house Outlet to Earthwork, Stone/Brick Work, Wood Work/Sunshade m3
street sewer Surface/Shallow Excavation, shutter, panal, batten m2
Pointing, Soling, DPC, Plastering, door, window m2
Water seal
Steel/Iron Work kg/Quintal

Fig. An intercepting trap 14. (b) Concrete is kept moist for at least 28
days. Nowadays, due to lack of time, the curing
P-trap
can be achieved by following modern techniques
Crown in 14-20 Days. Nevertheless, it is always advis-
able to keep concrete moist for at least 14 days.
Q-trap
Water
seal 15. (b)
Effective Span (Leff)
Dip
S-trap
Effective span ( l eff )

Simply supported Continuous Cantilever

beam or slab beam or slab
Gully trap: These traps are constructed outside the d
d

building to carry waste water discharge from sink, l0 w<

l0
12 w
l0 l0
12 d
washbasin & bathroom etc. & are connected to w w
same as
d
leff =l0 +
2
simply
the nearest building drain/sewer to prevent the l0 + d
supported
d
min.of or case l0
w w
foul gases from sewer do not come to the house. l0 +
2
+
2
l0 l0 l0
leff = l0
w
+
w
d 2
Nahani / Floor trap:This trap is provided in the floor l0 + 2
Minimum of or
w
to collect waste water from shower, sink, washbasin l0 + 2

& bathroom etc.The minimum depth of water seal 16. (d)

should be 50 mm. These are available in UPVC or
cast iron material & have removable grating (JALI) 17. (c) Distemper are available in various
colours, made with base as white chalk & thin-
on the top of the trap.
ner as water.
10. (b) MCB stands for Miniature Circuit  Distemper is cheaper than paints.
Breaker. It automatically switches OFF electri-  Distempers are the cheaper variety of paints in
cal circuit during any abnormal condition in the which chalk is used as base & water as carrier &
electrical network such as overload & short glue as emulsifying agent. Available in powder or
circuitconditions.. paste form.
11. (d)  They are most suitable for plastered surfaces as
well as white washed surface of interior walls.
12. (a) Following are different methods of  Distempers are workable & easy in application
levelling - but less durable
(a) Direct levelling- It is also known as spirit  This is used as interior paint for homes.
levelling.In it, spirit level is attached to the tele-  It is not used for surfaces exposed to weather.
scope of levelling instrument. It is most common  Distempers are washed away when used in ex-
method of levelling. posed surfaces.
(b) Indirect levelling- (i) Barometric levelling : It is Varnish
quick method. In it, elevations are determined by  Varnish is a nearly homogenous solution of resin
change in atmospheric pressure. in oil, alcohol or turpentine.
(ii) Trignometric levelling : In it, vertical elevations  The surface looks after the varnish glossy. Var-
are calculated by measuring horizontal distances nish provides a protective coating without sub-
& elevation angles. stantially changing the color of the surface.
(iii) Hypsometric levelling : In it, difference of eleva-  The type of solvent depends upon the type of resin
tion is calculated by noting the temperature at used.

[ 444 ]
 [ S. Sorout , Whatsapp - 9255624029 ]
 The oil dries with time & other solvents evapo- tant structural alterations.
rate leaving behind a solid transparent resin film
21. (b) Damp Proofing: Damp proofing in
over the surface.
construction is a type of moisture control tech-
• Drier in varnish is litharge.
nique applied to building walls, floors & roads to
18. (d) prevent moisture from passing into the interior
19. (b) space by using damp proofing materials.It is pro-
vided at plinth level.
20. (c) Types of Estimate
Damp Proofing Materials:
• Preliminary or Approximate Estimate or Ab-
1. Flexible material like butyl rubber, hot bitumen,
stract Estimate:
plastic sheets etc.
It is required for preliminary studies of various 2. Rigid materials, like impervious bricks stones,
aspect of a project or work, to decide the finan- slates, cement morter, or cement concrete painted
cial position & policy for administrative action by with bitumen.
the competent authority. 3. Semi-rigid materials like mastic asphalt.
4. Flexible material used for damp proofing is bitu-
 In it various quantities are worked out with the men sheeting
help of many short 5. The maximum size of the aggregate used in a
DPC is about 12.5 mm
cuts.
6. The most commonly used damp proofing mate-
 It is an estimate which is very near to final esti- rial is bitumen
mate. 23. (d)
• Plinth Area Estimate:Square Meter Method Description Uni t
Earthwork, Stone/Brick Work, Wood Work/Sunshade m3
This is prepared on the basis of plinth area (B
L) of building. 29. (d)

• Cube Rate Estimate:

It is prepared on the basis of the cubical contents
(LBH) of the building.
• Detailed or Item Rate Estimate:
It is an most accurate & reliable method.It con-
sists of working out the quantities of each item (a) Bevelled (b) Queen-closer (c) Queen-closer
closer (half) (quarter)
of works and working the cost.
• Building cost Index is an index number that
measures the average rate of input construction
cost changes of categorized building in compari-
son with that of the reference month.
(d) King closer (e) Full (f) Mitred
Special point: Degree of Accuracy (descreasing or- brick closer
der)
Detailed > Cube rate > Plinth area > Rough esti-
mate
Revise estimate: Estimate is revised If
(a) When the expenditure of work exceeds
by more than 10% of the administrative (g) Half bat (h) Three quarter (i) Bevelled
bat bat
approval.
(b) When a sanctioned estimate's variation is
30. (a) Treatment Methods
more than 5% due to any cause except impor-

[ 445 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

Unit Operations: The means of treatment in Depending upon the mechanisms used to carry the
which the application of physical forces earth pressure, these are classfied into following types:
predominates are known as unit opeations. 1. Gravity retaining wall, 2. Cantilever retaining
wall, 3. Buttress wall.
Ex: Sedimentation, screening, mixing etc. A
Unit process: The types of treatment in which Ground Surface
the removal of contaminants brought about by the Surcharge
Stem
addition of chemicals or the use of biological mass
or microbial activities.
D B C
Ex: ASP, Trickling filter, Oxidation Pond etc. Toe Heel
Toe slab Heel slab
Disinfection
Oil and Grease Trap (a) Gravity wall (b) T-Shaped cantilever
Bar Grit (Skimming Tank) Biological Unit SST retaining wall
Screen chamber

SST
Sludge
Screening PST studge
Grits
Oil/Grease Underdrain
Optional Unit water Drying Beds Sludge Digester
Wastewater Flow Dried sludge Gases
Sludge Flow for disposal Effluent for
(c) Reversed L-shaped
Gases final disposal cantilever retaining wall
39. (d) White and Coloured Portland ce-
PST-Primary Settling Tank, SST- Secondary
ment (IS: 8042) : From Pure white chalk, china
Settling Tank
clay & Iron Oxide should not be more than 1%.
Schematic flow diagram of a typical conventional
 These are used for making Terrazzo flooring,
treatment plant
ornamental works & casting stones,
31. (a) CPM - Critical Path Method. Monuments buildings.
M.R. Walker & J.E. Kelley of Ramination R&  It is also called Rainbow/ snowcem/ colocrete
developed CPM for the construction of chemical cement.
plants in United States.  Hunter scale is use for checking the
whiteness of cements
34. (a) English bond: Alternate courses of
 Whiteness should not be less than 70% when
headers & stretchers.
use ISI scale.
 English Bond is stronger & costly than flemish  5–10% Colouring pigment before grinding for
Bond. colour cement.
 Mostly English bond is used in government
work 40. (b) Estimated cost of work = 15 × 300 = 4500
 Adopted for work where strength is of
prime importance. 43. (d) Portland Pozzolana cement
(IS:1489 Part-I) : OPC + 10– 30% of fly ash
H H H H H H by mass of PPC. It is use in marine work.
 Free lime is removed. Hence, resistant to
S S S S S
chemical attack increases
H H H H H H  Pozzolana increase impermeability & water
retaining capacity of concrete
 Pozzolana has no cementing property in itself
38. (b) Retaining wall: but when it combines with lime, it produces a
A retaining wall (structure) is used to retain the ground stable lime pozzolana compound which has
surface at different elevations on either side of it. Shear cementitious property.
key is provided in a retaining wall to avoid sliding.
44. (a)
Types of retaining wall

[ 446 ]
 [ S. Sorout , Whatsapp - 9255624029 ]
whichever has the higher value should be
adopted. Lintels are made of different types of
materials, such as – wood, stone, brick and R.C.C.
Minimum Lintel:
Pitch line
head room
Landing Atleast 2.05 m
Flight Riser (4 inch-7 inch)
Tread (11 inch minimum) Lintel
Window opening

Lintels are the beams provided over the openings

45. (b) Septic Tank
in walls for doors & windows.
 Designed as ordinary settling tank. Bearing of lintel should be minimum of following:
(a) 10 cm (b) Height of lintel (c) (1/10 ) to (1/12)
of the span of lintel
Cowl
Particulars Arch Lintels
Shape Curved Horizontal and straight
Bed Joint Joints are radial except in Joints are horizontal
Vent Pipe monolithic construction
Manhole Lateral thrust Exert on vertical support Do not exert
Rise Provided Not provided
Appearance Good architectural Simple appearance
appearance
Scum Strength Quite strong vertical uniform Equally strong for uniform &
Inlet Outlet loading but weak under point loading
point loading
Buffle wall

Sludge 47. (d) The size of the designation A3 in mm

is 420 x
297. The designations A0, A1, A2, A4 and A5 have
Sloping Floor
sizes 1189 x 841 mm, 841 x 594 mm, 594 x 420
Septic Tank
mm, 297 x 210 mm and 210 x 148 mm respec-
tively. Standardizing helps in uniformity of the
products all over the nation and will avoid local
Design Parameters of Septic Tank variations.
 Flow of sewage 40 – 70 lpcd & rate of
48. (a) Total estimated cost of work
accumulation = 30 1pc per year
 Detention time 12 – 36 hrs & Cleaning period 6 = (4 × 3) × 750 = 9000
month - 1 year
49. (c)
 Length/width ratio = 2 to 3 & Depth 1.2 – 1.8
m 50. (c) Composition of Submission Drawing or
 Volume of septic tank = (Sewage flow × Building
Detention time) + (Sludge accumulation rate × Various maps are drawn before the building is con-
cleaning period). structed. Maps are drawn by draughtsman, engineers
 The effluents from the septic tank are discharged or architects. Drawings and filled forms are repre-
into soak pit.
sented to the concerning officer for the approval of
 Soak pit is effective only in highland (where
water table is well below ground level) & prefer- building construction,
able at locations where soil is porous. 56. (c) The level between the base portion of
46. (a) A lintel works as a beam and transfers the window and portion of the floor above ground
its load on the masonry of both sides of the doors level (upwards) is called Sill level.
and windows. The overlapping of lintel over the
57. (*) Classifiaction of Surveying
masonry on both sides of the doors and walls is
Based on Purpose
very significant. For overlapping one end of the
lintel–either 10 cm, or 4 cm per 30 cm of span (i) Topographical Survey: It is conducted to ob-

[ 447 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]
tain data & to make a map indicating inequalites Type of reinforcement
of land surface. Topographic Survey is done to Type of slab
determine the Natural features of a Country. Mild steel Fe 415
Scale range is 1 : 25000 to 1 : 1000000.
(ii) Hydrographic Survey: It is conducted on or Simply 35 28
supported
near water bodies. Marine survey is also one of
it’s type.
Continuous 40 32
(iii) Engineering Survey: It is used for design &
construction of new routes (roads & railways).
Also used to calculate for route alignment.  10 
(iv) Geological Survey: It is conducted to obtain Where as   factor is neglected.
 span 
data of different strata of earth’s surface for
the purpose of geological studies. 66. (c)
(v) Cadastral Survey : It is used to produce plans
of property boundries for legal purpose. The
revenue chain is used in cadastral surveying.
Also called public land survey.
(vi) Astronomic Survey: It is conducted for de-
termination of azimuths, latitudes, longitudes,
local time etc. at various places on the earth by
observing heavenly bodies. Absolute location of
a point on earth surface is obtained by it.
Classification based on instrument used -
Chain surveying , Compass surveying, Theodolite sur-
vey, Levelling survey, Contouring, EDM sur-
vey, Photogrammetric survey, Tacheometric 67. (b) Slabs: Plate elements having depth
survey. much smaller than its other two dimensions.
64. (a)  They carry distributed load primarily by bending
One way slab Two way slab
ly Constant ly
>2 deflection <2
lx along longer lx
span
V

Parabolic deflection Parabolic deflection

along shorter span along both span

68. (*)
69. (c) Maximum Longitudinal Reinforce-
ment
 It is 6% of gross cross-sectional area of the column.
 It can be reduced to 4% at lapped splice locations
for better placement & compaction.
Soffit: It is the inner surface of an arch. Sometimes,
intrados and soffit are used synonymously. Other specifications
65. (d) 1. Minimum diameter of longitudinal bar = 12 mm
2. Column’s Slenderness Limit

If span  10 m, then   values are (a) Unsupported length between end restrains >
 d  basic
60 times least lateral dimension
Cantilever beam 7
(b) If in any given plane one end of column is
Simply sup ported beam 20 unrestrained, then its unsupported length >
Continuous beam 26

[ 448 ]
 [ S. Sorout , Whatsapp - 9255624029 ]
72. (b) Basic Information-
100B2
D  Standard size = 19 cm × 9 cm × 9 cm
 Nominal size (with mortar) = 20 cm × 10 cm ×10
3. Minimum Number of bars
cm
(a) For rectangular columns = 4
 Traditional bricks = 9" × 4.5" × 3" (23 cm × 11.4
(b) For circular columns = 6
cm× 7.6 cm)
4. Maximum centre to centre spacing of
 Frog (indent in the brick) = 10 cm × 4 cm × 1cm
reinforcement = 300 mm
 Frog is provided on top surface and it is useful in
5. Cover to reinforcement
key joint between mortar and brick.
(a) Minimum = 40 mm
(b) It can be reduced to 25 mm for small sized  Weight of 1 m3 of brick = 1800 kg
column  Avg. weight of the brick = 3 kg to 3.5 kg
(c) In aggresive environment maximum cover  No. of bricks using 1m3 brick work = 500
is limited to 75 mm.  The minimum thickness of brick wall is 100mm
 The density of bricks should be 1700 to 1900 kg/
70. (a) m3
Constitute Function 74. (a)
(i) Silica (50-60%) Provide strength, hardness,
durability to brick.
(ii) Alumina (20 –30%) Give plasticity to brick
(iii) Lime (<5%) Causes silica to fuse
during burning & binding
particles together
(iv) Iron oxide (5-6%) Provide red colour &
improves impermeability
& durability.
(v) Magnesia (<1%) Give yellow tint

CIVIL Ki Goli
Alumina Iron Oxide

S A L I M

Silica Lime Magnesia

71. (d)
Admixture

Chemical Admixture Mineral Admixture

(a) Plasticizers (a) Pozzolanas
(b) Retarders (b) Silica fume
(c) Air entrainers (c) Rice husk
(d) Accelerators (d) Blast furnace slag
(e) Super plasticizer
 IS:9103 describes about admixture
 Mineral admixture are added after grinding of
cement clinker. They replace the cement by 10-
70% by mass.
 Chemical admixture are added at the time of mix-
ing of concrete.

[ 449 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]
sanatoria, nursing home, hospital, orphanage, jails,
mental hospitals etc.
 Group D: Assembly buildings: Include any
building like theatre, drama theatre, auditorium,
museums, assembly hall, exhibition hall, restau-
rant, place of worship, dance hall, sport stadium,
club house, skating rings, gymnasiums etc.
 Group E: Business buildings: Include any
building for transaction of business, record for
similar purpose etc.
 Group F: Mercantile buildings: Include any
building which is used as stores, shop, market for
display and sale for mercantile either whole sale
or retail.
 Group G: Industrial buildings: Include any
building in which product or material of all kind
and property are fabricated or assembled such as
gas plant, refineries, dairies, smoke house, textile
mill and saw mill.
 Group H: Storage buildings: Include any build-
ings for storage or sheltering of goods, wares, like
ware houses, garage, old storage, etc.
 Group I: Hazardous buildings: Include any
building which is used for storage, handling, manu-
facturing of highly combustible explosive mate-
rial or which are highly toxic in nature etc.
76. (d) Contour lines showing a uniform, steep
slope on a map will be evenly spaced, but close
together.
78. (b) Rhythm is the organization of the re-
petitive forms, elements and space in architec-
ture. When you repeat elements, the intervals
between those repeated elements creates a sense
of rhythm.
79. (b) In brick or stone masonry expansion
joints normally need not be necessary, except in
the case of long walls exceeding 30 m in length;
in such long walls the expansion joints shall be
75. (b) Type of Buildings not less than 15 mm wide and shall be spaced
not more than 30 m apart.
As per National Building code of India, building is clas-
sified into nine groups based on occupancy as follows: 80. (b)
 Group A: Residential Building: Sleeping ac-
commodation is provided for normal residential Weathering
Joist Parapet wall
purpose.
Weathering
 Group B: Educational buildings: Include any Cornice
Wall
building used for shool college etc. plate
 Group C: Institutional buildings: Include any Throating Throating
building used for purpose like medical or other Wall
Wall
treatment or care of infant, aged person etc. like

[ 450 ]
 [ S. Sorout , Whatsapp - 9255624029 ]
Corbel Cornice Coping 85. (d) Seasoning of Timber (IS: 1141) :
Corbel: A corbel is a projecting stone which is usually It is the process of reducing the moisture content
provided to serve as support for roof truss, beam, weather sheds. of timber in order to
Cornice: A cornice is a course of stone provided at the top of prevent the timber. It is use for
wall. It is weathered and throated to dispose off rain water.
(a) Reduce its weight & Increase strength &
Coping: A coping is a coarse of stone which laid at the top
wall so as to protect the wall from rain water. durability
Throating:-It is a groove provided on underside of teh pro-
(b) Make timber burn readily as a fuel
jecting elements such as sills, coping, cornices etc. so that rain (c) Make it suitable for painting
water can be discharged clear off the wall surface. (d) Reduce its tendency to split & decay &
Reduce shrinkage and warping
82. (c) Following are the methods of seasoning -
(a) Natural seasoning
(b) Artificial seasoning
Rocks Natural Seasoning: It is carried out by natural
air, hence even called air seasoning & Moisture content
Geological
Classification can be brought down to 15–20%. The duration of a
timber usually requires for natural seasoning is 6
Sedimentary Igneous Meta-Morphic months (minimum).
Rock Rock Rock Artificial Seasoning: It is adopted for faster
Formed by These areIgneous &
formed by drying. It is possible to provide different drying
weathering sedimentary
action of cooling &rocks are conditions based on the species of timber. In it, we
existing solidification
undergone can reduced moisture content as per requirement.
Rocky of magma &
considerable
lava change with Required time for artificial seasoning of wood is 5
Ex. Ex. high to 10 day
pressure &
1. Gypsum 1. Trap temperature (a) Boiling: Timber is immersed in water & it is
2. Sand 2. Dolerite Ex. boiled. It affects the elasticity & strength of
stone 3. Basalt
3. Lime 1. Marble wood. It is costly method
4. Granite (made from
stone lime stone) (b) Kiln Seasoning: Drying is carried out in air
4. Shales 5. Pegmatite 2. Quartz tight chamber or oven
5. Gravel 6. Diorite (made from (c) Electrical Seasoning: High frequency
sandstone)
6. Lignite alternating current is used. It’s most rapid but
3.
uneconmical method. It give uniform
seasoning.
High quality timber and plywood is obtained
from it.
(d) Chemical (Salt seasoning): Timber is
83. (d) The addition of pozzolanas to con- immersed in solution of suitable salt. It is taken
crete results in. out & seasoned in the ordinary way.
(a) Improvement in durability by reducing (e) Water Seasoning: The log of wood
permeability immersed in running water with their larger
(b) Increase in workability of concrete. ends pointing upstream Therfore sap, sugar
(c) Reduction in shrinkage. (But in cement, & gum are leached out and are replaced by
it increases) water. (For 2-4 weeks).
(d) Reduction in segregation & bleeding of 86. (c) Types of Stone Masonry
concrete.
There are mainly two types of stone masonry,
 The optimum amount of Pozzolana, as namely, rubble stone masonry and ashlar stone
replacement for cement, may normally masonry. In rubble stone masonry, stones of irregular
range between (10-30)% & may be as low shapes are used while in ashlar stone masonry stones
as (4-6) % for Natural Pozzolanas. are dressed to regular shapes and then used as building
blocks.

[ 451 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]
Rubble Masonry: Irregular shaped and size (c) When a wall shows signs of bulging out
stones are used in rubble stone masonry. They may (d) When opening are to be made or enlarged in
be hammered to remove sharp corners, before using. the wall
The following are the different types of rubble stone Shores may be of following type:
masonry: (a) Flying Shores: It is also called horizontal shor-
•Dry rubble masonry ing. These are used to give horizontal support to
•Random rubble masonry two adjacent parallel party wall which have be-
come unsafe due to removal or collapse of the
•Square rubble masonry intermediate building.
•Miscellaneous (b) Raking shores: In this method inclined mem-
Ashlar Masonry bers rackers are used to give lateral support to
In this type of construction, stones are cut to the wall rackers should be inclined to the ground
regular shapes. The height of each stone in a course by 45o to make them more effective
is 250 mm to 300 mm. They are square or regular in (c) Dead or vertical shores: It consist of vertical
shape. The length of stone is kept less than three times member known as dead shores.
the height and it is not less than half the height. Ashlar 89. (a) Basic Information-
masonry may be further classified as:  Standard size = 19 cm × 9 cm × 9 cm
• Ashlar fine tooled  Nominal size (with mortar) = 20 cm × 10 cm ×10
• Ashlar rough tooled cm
• Ashlar rock or quarry faced  Traditional bricks = 9" × 4.5" × 3" (23 cm × 11.4
• Ashlar chamfered cm× 7.6 cm)
• Ashlar block in course 90. (d) Plinth : This portion of the building is in
• Ashlar facing between the surface of the overounding ground
level
87. (d) BUREAU OF INDIAN STAN-
DARDS • The plinth level of the building is generally
kept higher (generally 30 cm or more) than
Specifications for all its objects are laid out by
the surounding ground level such that proper
the Bureau of Indian Standards in its various books. drainage of site is assured.
Lighting equipment, machine etc. all should be certi- • In case that the plinth is 20cm or less, then
fied by BIS (Bureau of Indian Standards). there is no need to provide any step.
The BIS is India's national standard body that Damp- proof course: D.P.C is provided to prevent
moisture rising up the wall.
functions under the ministry of consumer affairs. food
• The horizontal D.P.C is usually 4.0cm thick
and public distribution. It was formed under the In- of cement concrete (1:2:4) is provided about
dian Standards Act, 1986 and it came into existence 10 to 20 cm above final ground level.
on 23rd December 1986. 91. (b) Lime obtain from relatively pure
This organization was earlier called the Indian lime stone (% purity 90% to 95%) is referred as
Standards Institute (ISI) which was established on 3rd quick lime or caustic lime or lump lime.
September 1946 and registered under the Societies  Slaking:- Quick lime has very high affinity (reac-
Registration Act, 1860. tivity) for water, hence instantly reacts with it &
Undergoes slacking leading to the formation of
88. (c) Shoring: Shoring is the construction hydrated lime. Quick lime slack vigrously, but set
of temporary structure to support temporarily an slowly
unsafe structure these render lateral support to
walls and are used under the following circum- CaO  H 2 O 
slaking
 Ca(OH) 2  Heat
Quick lim e / Hydrated lim e /
stances : Causticlim e /
Lump lim e
Slaked lim e /
milk of lim e
(a) When wall cracks due to unequal settlement
of foundation Calcination
(b) When adjacent structure is to be dismantled It refers to the heating of lime stone to redness in the
absence of Air.

[ 452 ]
 [ S. Sorout , Whatsapp - 9255624029 ]
Lime is obtained by Calcination of limestone. 9. Haunch: It is the lower half of the arch between
Moisture & CO2 are removed from the limestone the crown and skew back.
leaving behind lime.
10. Centre or striking point: It is the geometrical
CaCO3 
calcination
CaO CO2 centre point from where the arch forming the extrados,
(lime)
arch rings & intrados are described or struck.
93. (c)
11. Span: It is the clear horizontal distance between
Constituents of Portland Cement (Raw Material) the supports.
Oxide Composition (%) Average 12. Depth or height: It is the perpendicular distance
Lime, CaO 60–65 63 between the intrados and extrados.
Silica, SiO2 17–25 20 13. Rise: It is the clear vertical distance between the
Alumina, Al2O3 3–8 6 highest point on the intrados and the springing line.
Iron oxide Fe2O3 0.5-6 3 14. Impost: It is the projecting course at the upper
Magnesia, MgO 0.5-4 2
part of a pier or abutment to stress the springing line.

Soda and/or potash, 0.5-1 1 15. Thickness (or breadth of soffit): This is the
Na2O + K2O
horizontal distance, measured perpendicular to the front
and back faces of an arch.
Sulphur trioxide, SO2 1-2 1.5
105. (d) Shoring: Shoring is the construction
94. (d) of temporary structure to support temporarily an
unsafe structure these render lateral support to
Types of footings
walls

Strip Isolated Raft/mat Pile foundation Combined

109. (a) For residential building : The size of step
footing footing foundation footing widely adopted 25  16cm.
 For public building : Generally length
of steps are increased and width reduced slightly
L L
B B
common step size for public buildings are
27 cm  15 cm or 30 cm  13 cm.

100. (a) Some Thumb Rule:

(a) (2R + T) = 60, (b) (R + T) = (40 – 45), (c) R
TECHNICAL TERMS in Arch × T = (400 – 450).
where, R – Rise in cm, T – Tread in cm.
1. Intrados: This is the inner curve of an arch.
110.(b) Floor area:
2. Extrados: It is the outer curve of an arch.
F.A. = Plinth area – area occupied by walls/In-
3. Crown: It is the highest part of extrados. termediate supports
4. Soffit: It is the inner surface of an arch. Some- Area of all floor
times, intrados and soffit are used synonymously. F.A. ratio = Area of total plot 100

5. Voussoirs: These are wedge-shaped units of  Area of Balcony included upto 50% in the floor
masonry, forming an arch. area.
6. Spandril: This is a curved-triangular space formed  The plinth area as compared to floor area is
between the extrados & the horizontal line through more than 30% to 40%
the crown. 111. (d)
7. Springer: It is the first voussoir at springing level; 1. Straight Stairs:- In it, stair runs straight between
it is immediately adjacent the skewback. the two floors.
8. Springs points: These are the points from which
the curve of the arch springs.

[ 453 ]
 [Follow at CIVIL Ki GOLI Facebook Page]

Landing Landing 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Upper

Half landing
space
landing
STRAIGHT STAIRS
D 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Up D

2. Turning Stairs:- In it,, flight takes turn.

It is of three types. Plan

 Quarter turning stair - DOG-LEGGED STAIR

(b) Open newel half turn stairs.

Newels

Up Quarter Up
A Space A
landing
Half
Plan well space
Quarter Turn Stairs landing
Up
It is the one which changes its direction either to the X
X
right or to the left, the turn being affected either
Plan
by introducing a quarter space landing or by pro- OPEN NEWEL HALF TURN STAIRS
viding winders.
Bifurcated stairs -

Handrail

Newel

Elevation
Bifurcated Stair

It is commonly used in public buildings at their en-

Elevation
trance hall. The stair has a wider flight at the bot-
tom, which bifurcated into two narrower flights, Open newel half turn stairs
one turning to the right & the other to the left, at
the landing.
 Half turn stairs: - It is the one which has its Three Quarter Turn Stair -

direction reversed, or changed at 180o.
A stairs turning through three right angles. In this
Such type of stairs are quite common. These may case an open well is formed.
be of three types:
3. Circular or helical or spiral stair -In these stairs,
(a) Dog-legged or newel half turn stairs. The steps radiate from the centre & don't have

[ 454 ]
 [ S. Sorout , Whatsapp - 9255624029 ]
either any landing or any intermediate newel
Ridge
post.The step radiate at an angle of 30o from the
core. The height of floor & rise are 3.68 m & 16
cm. The head room is 2.08 m and width of stair is
2 m.
Mansard Roof

3. Geometrical stair - These stairs have any geo-

metrical shape & not require any newel post. Ridge
Stopped Hip
Triangle Ridge Hip
112. (c) No. of steps are not more than 12 &
not less than 3 in a flight.
 Angle of Inclination (Pitch) – (25° – 40°) & Maxi- Hip Roof Gambrel Roof

mum pitch or slope in staircase for public building

= 330
Deck
114. (*) Floor area:
F.A. = Plinth area – area occupied by walls/In-
termediate supports Deck Roof

Area of all floor  Butterfly roofs is provide plenty of light &

F.A. ratio = Area of total plot 100
ventilation but not the effective when it comes
to water drainage.
Floor area 400
F.A.R. =   0.8 )
Plot area 500
116. (d)
Types of roofs:
 Gable roof is a common type of sloping roof
which slopes in two directions. It looks like an
inverted/upside down V. These are not ideal for
the areas with high wind.
 Gambrel roof slopes in two direction but there
is break in each slope. It is most commonly use
on barns. It has the benefit of providing a good
amount of space in the attic.
 Flat roofs are common in commercial building.
 Pitched roofs are use in areas of heavy rain
falls and snow fall. The slope of roof shall be
more than 10°. They may have slopes upto 45-
60°. These are preferred in large span structure
like as workshops, warehouses, factory buildings
etc.
 Mansard roof is a french design & it is more
difficult to construct than the hip or gable roof.
It slopes in the four directions but each slope
has a break.
Vertical
triangle Ridge

Lean-to-Roof
Gable Roof

[ 455 ]